Chevrolet Automobile 2009 Malibu User Manual

2009 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M  
OnStar® System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A notice tells about something that can damage the  
vehicle.  
Safety Warnings and Symbols  
A circle with a slash  
through it is a safety  
Notice: These mean there is something that could  
damage your vehicle.  
symbol which means  
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”  
or “Do not let this happen.”  
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the  
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice  
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.  
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use  
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.  
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about  
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore  
the warning.  
Vehicle Symbols  
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols  
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text  
describing the operation or information relating to a  
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.  
{ CAUTION:  
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your  
owner manual for additional instructions or information.  
These mean there is something that could hurt  
you or other people.  
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a  
service manual for additional instructions or information.  
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid  
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Symbol Chart  
. : Fuel Gage  
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on  
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information  
on the symbol, refer to the index.  
+ : Fuses  
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
j : LATCH System Child Restraints  
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
: : Oil Pressure  
9 : Airbag Readiness Light  
# : Air Conditioning  
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®  
$ : Brake System Warning Light  
" : Charging System  
} : Power  
/ : Remote Vehicle Start  
> : Safety Belt Reminders  
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor  
F : Traction Control  
I : Cruise Control  
B : Engine Coolant Temperature  
O : Exterior Lamps  
M : Windshield Washer Fluid  
# : Fog Lamps  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Seats and Restraint System  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Head Restraints  
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints  
in the outboard seating positions.  
{ CAUTION:  
With head restraints that are not installed and  
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that  
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a  
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all  
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.  
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is  
at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.  
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in  
a crash.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pull the head restraint up to  
raise it. To lower the head  
restraint, press the button,  
located on the top of the  
seatback, and push the  
restraint down.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you  
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when  
the vehicle is not moving.  
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved  
forward or rearward.  
1. Lift the bar to unlock  
the seat.  
Push down on the head restraint after the button is  
released to make sure that it is locked in place.  
2. Slide the seat to the  
desired position and  
release the bar.  
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.  
Front Seats  
Manual Seats  
{ CAUTION:  
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat  
is locked in place.  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is  
moving. The sudden movement could startle and  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Seats  
Manual Lumbar  
On vehicles with this  
feature, the handle is  
located on the outboard  
side of the seat.  
Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease or  
increase lumbar support.  
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to  
operate them are located on the outboard side of  
the seats.  
To adjust the seat:  
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the  
control forward or rearward.  
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by  
moving the front of the control up or down.  
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by  
moving the rear of the control up or down.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat  
setting. The indicator light will be lit next to the number 1.  
Heated Seats  
On vehicles with heated  
front seats, the buttons are  
located on the outboard  
side of the driver’s and front  
passenger seats.  
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.  
The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is  
turned off.  
Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on.  
The seat will heat to the high setting. The indicator light  
above the switch will be lit next to the number 2.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever  
used to operate them is located on the outboard side  
of the seat.  
Reclining Seatbacks  
Manual Reclining Seatbacks  
{ CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is  
moving. The sudden movement could startle and  
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you  
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when  
the vehicle is not moving.  
{ CAUTION:  
To recline the seatback:  
1. Lift the recline lever.  
If either seatback is not locked, it could move  
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could  
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always  
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they  
are locked.  
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then  
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.  
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is  
locked.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To return the seatback to an upright position:  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the  
seatback and the seatback returns to the upright  
position.  
For proper protection when the vehicle is in  
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well  
back in the seat and wear your safety belt  
properly.  
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.  
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is  
locked.  
{ CAUTION:  
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is  
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle  
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you  
are reclined like this.  
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,  
you could go into it, receiving neck or other  
injuries.  
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the  
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt  
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.  
This could cause serious internal injuries.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is  
moving.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seatback Latches  
{ CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is  
moving. The sudden movement could startle and  
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you  
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when  
the vehicle is not moving.  
If your vehicle is a coupe or retractable hardtop model,  
it has a seatback latch as part of the manual recline  
lever. This feature provides easy access to the  
rear seats. To operate the seatback latch, pull up on the  
manual recline lever. The seatback will automatically  
spring forward. To operate the latch from the rear seat,  
pull back on the top of the manual recline lever.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Lift Seat  
{ CAUTION:  
If either seatback is not locked, it could move  
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could  
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always  
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they  
are locked.  
Lift the seatback up to return it to the upright position.  
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.  
To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of  
the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear Seats  
Split Folding Rear Seat  
With this feature, either side of the seatback can be  
folded down for more cargo space.  
Before folding a seatback, make sure the front seat is  
not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold down  
all the way.  
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still  
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety  
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return  
them to their normal stowed position before folding  
a rear seat.  
To lower the rear seatback, pull up on the seatback  
strap while folding the seatback down. This allows  
access to the trunk.  
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and  
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback to  
be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that the  
safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback in  
all three positions.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly  
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection  
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt  
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear  
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety  
belts are properly routed and attached, and are  
not twisted.  
If either seatback is not locked, it could move  
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could  
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always  
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they  
are locked.  
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the  
upright locked position.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Belts  
{ CAUTION:  
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,  
people riding in these areas are more likely to be  
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to  
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not  
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure  
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a  
safety belt properly.  
This section of the manual describes how to use  
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not  
to do with safety belts.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt  
cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your  
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the  
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things  
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the  
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be  
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you  
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten  
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)  
are restrained properly too.  
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the  
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30  
for additional information.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law  
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:  
Why Safety Belts Work  
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as  
it goes.  
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have  
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.  
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so  
serious that even buckled up, a person would not  
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of  
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes  
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have  
been badly hurt or killed.  
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,  
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does  
matter... a lot!  
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on  
wheels.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Put someone on it.  
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider  
does not stop.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The person keeps going until stopped by something.  
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...  
or the instrument panel...  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Questions and Answers About  
Safety Belts  
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if  
I am wearing a safety belt?  
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety  
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious  
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle  
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.  
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are  
upside down.  
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to  
wear safety belts?  
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they  
work with safety belts — not instead of them.  
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants  
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.  
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but  
especially in side and other collisions.  
or the safety belts!  
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.  
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,  
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why  
safety belts make such good sense.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from  
home, why should I wear safety belts?  
This section is only for people of adult size.  
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a  
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and  
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good  
driver does not protect you from things beyond your  
control, such as bad drivers.  
Be aware that there are special things to know about  
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for  
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the  
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and  
Young Children on page 1-35. Follow those rules for  
everyone’s protection.  
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of  
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries  
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph  
(65 km/h).  
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.  
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often  
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.  
Safety belts are for everyone.  
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of  
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in  
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.  
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety  
belt, there is important information you should know.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones  
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap  
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on  
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even  
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the  
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body  
are best able to take belt restraining forces.  
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or  
crash.  
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in  
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn  
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is  
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too  
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder  
belt should fit snugly against your body.  
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as  
much protection this way.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too  
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap  
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could  
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt  
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just  
touching the thighs.  
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as  
much protection this way.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled  
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt  
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces  
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This  
could cause serious internal injuries. Always  
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.  
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over  
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too  
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.  
The belt force would then be applied on the  
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could  
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt  
goes under the armrests.  
A: The belt is over an armrest.  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if you wear the  
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your  
body would move too far forward, which would  
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,  
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,  
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You  
could also severely injure internal organs like your  
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over  
the shoulder and across the chest.  
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should  
be worn over the shoulder at all times.  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the  
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would  
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body  
could move too far forward increasing the chance  
of head and neck injury. You might also slide  
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be  
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause  
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should  
go over the shoulder and across the chest.  
A: The belt is behind the body.  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a  
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt  
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make  
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your  
dealer/retailer to fix it.  
A: The belt is twisted across the body.  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
All seating positions in the vehicle have a  
lap-shoulder belt.  
The following instructions explain how to wear a  
lap-shoulder belt properly.  
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can  
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.  
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.  
Do not let it get twisted.  
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt  
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across  
you more slowly.  
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled  
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature  
may be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt go  
back all the way and start again.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.  
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt  
Extender on page 1-32.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that the  
safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.  
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the  
right front seating position may affect the passenger  
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System  
on page 1-66 for more information.  
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,  
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper  
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the  
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See  
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this  
section for instruction on use and important safety  
information.  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the  
shoulder belt.  
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.  
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the  
latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt  
is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching  
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.  
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety  
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the  
lap belt on smaller occupants.  
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out  
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,  
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster  
Safety Belt Pretensioners  
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the  
driver and right front passenger position.  
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the  
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt  
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety  
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts  
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal  
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for  
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has  
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help  
tighten the safety belts in a side crash.  
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt  
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away  
from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder.  
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce  
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.  
Squeeze the buttons (A)  
on the sides of the height  
adjuster and move the  
height adjuster to the  
desired position.  
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash,  
they will need to be replaced, and probably other new  
parts for the vehicle’s safety belt system. See Replacing  
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to  
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make  
sure it has locked into position.  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added  
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown  
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a  
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away  
from the neck and head.  
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position  
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to  
the safety belt:  
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the  
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.  
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of  
the seatback and the interior body to remove the  
guide from its storage clip.  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is not properly worn may  
not provide the protection needed in a crash.  
The person wearing the belt could be seriously  
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the  
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of  
the body are best able to take belt restraining  
forces.  
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.  
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the  
guide on top.  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant  
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be  
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.  
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as  
described previously in this section. Make sure  
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.  
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt  
edges together so that the safety belt can be removed  
from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its  
storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip.  
Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between  
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop  
of the elastic cord exposed.  
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and  
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below  
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.  
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.  
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that  
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,  
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is  
wearing them properly.  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Belt Extender  
Child Restraints  
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,  
you should use it.  
Older Children  
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer  
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,  
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will  
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do  
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it  
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.  
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it  
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the  
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.  
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should  
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the  
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for  
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt  
until the child passes the below fit test:  
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?  
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt  
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can  
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face  
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,  
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt  
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should  
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause  
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.  
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend  
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to  
the booster seat.  
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt  
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using  
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety  
Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on  
page 1-26 for more information. If the shoulder belt  
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the  
booster seat.  
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under  
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-26.  
According to accident statistics, children and infants are  
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system  
or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating  
position.  
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,  
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return  
to the booster seat.  
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike  
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown  
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety  
belts properly.  
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length  
of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the  
booster seat.  
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position  
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional  
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Never do this.  
Never allow two children to wear the same safety  
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the  
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be  
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety  
belt must be used by only one person at a time.  
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the  
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be  
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder  
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be  
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could  
move too far forward increasing the chance of  
head and neck injury. The child might also slide  
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be  
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause  
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should  
go over the shoulder and across the chest.  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a  
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and  
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave  
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow  
children to play with the safety belts.  
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection  
for adults and older children, but not for young  
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety  
belt system nor its airbag system is designed for  
them. Every time infants and young children  
ride in vehicles, they should have the protection  
provided by appropriate child restraints.  
Infants and Young Children  
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes  
infants and all other children. Neither the distance  
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes  
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,  
the law in every state in the United States and in  
every Canadian province says children up to some age  
must be restrained while in a vehicle.  
Children who are not restrained properly can strike  
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a  
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will  
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during  
a crash. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph  
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly  
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms.  
An infant should be secured in an appropriate  
restraint.  
1-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Children who are up against, or very close to, any  
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or  
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the  
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint  
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you  
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the  
right front seat, always move the front passenger  
seat as far back as it will go.  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What are the different types of add-on child  
restraints?  
{ CAUTION:  
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the  
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.  
Selection of a particular restraint should take into  
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,  
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be  
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will  
be used.  
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during  
a crash, infants need complete support. This is  
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed  
and its head weighs so much compared with  
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a  
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,  
so the crash forces can be distributed across the  
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and  
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in  
rear-facing child restraints.  
For most basic types of child restraints, there are  
many different models available. When purchasing a  
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a  
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label  
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety  
standards.  
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that  
come with the restraint state the weight and height  
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,  
there are many kinds of restraints available for  
children with special needs.  
1-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Child Restraint Systems  
{ CAUTION:  
A rear-facing infant  
seat (A) provides restraint  
with the seating surface  
against the back of  
the infant.  
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that  
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain  
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may  
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,  
the belt would apply force on a body area that is  
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone  
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the  
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,  
young children should always be secured in  
appropriate child restraints.  
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a  
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A forward-facing child  
seat (B) provides restraint  
for the child’s body  
with the harness.  
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to  
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.  
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the  
window.  
1-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the  
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on  
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this  
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,  
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement  
copy from the manufacturer.  
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in  
the Vehicle  
{ CAUTION:  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child  
is in it.  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash  
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the  
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the  
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH  
system, following the instructions that came with  
that child restraint and the instructions in this  
manual.  
Securing the Child Within the Child  
Restraint  
{ CAUTION:  
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint  
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems  
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the  
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH  
(LATCH) on page 1-44 for more information. A child can  
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not  
properly secured in the vehicle.  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash  
if the child is not properly secured in the child  
restraint. Secure the child properly following the  
instructions that came with that child restraint.  
1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to Put the Restraint  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no  
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that  
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though it is turned off.  
We recommend that children and child restraints  
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child  
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in  
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in  
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,  
using safety belts.  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear  
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint  
in a rear seat.  
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the  
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
{ CAUTION:  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66  
for additional information.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger  
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the  
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child  
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger  
seat is in a forward position.  
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating  
position, study the instructions that came with your child  
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.  
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to  
secure the child restraint properly.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child  
is in it.  
A. Occupant prohibited  
B. Child restraint using  
LATCH  
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear  
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.  
Depending on where you place the child restraint, you  
may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies  
or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child  
restraints.  
A. Child restraint using  
LATCH  
B. Child restraint or  
occupant using  
safety belt  
Configurations for Use of Child  
Restraints  
C. Child restraint using  
safety belt or LATCH  
or occupant using  
safety belt  
A. Child restraint using  
LATCH  
B. Child restraint or  
occupant using  
safety belt  
1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. Child restraint or  
occupant using  
safety belt  
Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children (LATCH)  
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving  
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation  
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses  
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child  
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.  
A. Child restraint or  
occupant using  
safety belt  
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is  
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s  
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the  
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the  
instructions in this manual. When installing a child  
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the  
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the  
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed  
using only the top tether and anchor.  
B. Child restraint using  
LATCH  
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,  
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.  
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with  
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its  
attachments. The following explains how to attach a  
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.  
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have  
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors  
and attachments.  
1-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lower Anchors  
Top Tether Anchor  
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.  
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating  
position that will accommodate a child restraint with  
lower attachments (B).  
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint  
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.  
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint  
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order  
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child  
restraint during driving or in a crash.  
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a  
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)  
to secure the top tether to the anchor.  
1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed  
for use with or without the top tether being attached.  
Others require the top tether always to be attached.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions  
for your child restraint.  
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor  
Locations  
i (Top Tether Anchor):  
Seating positions with  
top tether anchors.  
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can  
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.  
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit  
is available.  
j (Lower Anchor): Seating  
positions with two lower  
anchors.  
Rear Seat  
1-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To assist you in locating  
the lower anchors, each  
rear anchor position has  
a label, near the crease  
between the seatback and  
the seat cushion.  
To assist you in locating  
the top tether anchors, the  
top tether anchor symbol  
is located on the cover.  
The top tether anchors are located under the covers,  
behind the rear seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to use  
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the  
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.  
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top  
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the  
top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come  
with the child restraint say that the top tether must be  
attached.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.  
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for  
additional information.  
1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for  
the LATCH System  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a  
single anchor. Attaching more than one child  
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor  
or attachment to come loose or even break during  
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To  
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a  
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.  
{ CAUTION:  
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to  
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to  
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child  
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a  
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the  
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure  
the restraint, following the instructions that came  
with the child restraint and the instructions in this  
manual.  
{ CAUTION:  
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a  
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and  
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any  
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so  
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt  
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if  
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has  
been installed.  
1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub  
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage  
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety  
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.  
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt  
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or  
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its  
stowed position, before folding the seat.  
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in  
the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint on  
page 1-42. Depending on where you place the child  
restraint, you may not be able to access certain safety  
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional  
passengers or child restraints.  
You cannot secure three child restraints using the LATCH  
anchors in the rear seat at the same time, but you can  
install two of them. If you want to do this, install one  
LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side position, and  
install the other one either in the driver-side position or in  
the center position. Refer to the following illustration to  
learn which anchors to use.  
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors  
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors  
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors  
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper  
anchor location.  
1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This system is designed to make installation of child  
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use  
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s  
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the  
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle  
anchor to secure a top tether.  
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that  
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the  
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.  
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the  
following steps:  
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.  
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the  
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have  
lower attachments or the desired seating position  
does not have lower anchors, secure the child  
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.  
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer  
Open the cover to expose the anchor.  
2.2. If the position you are using has an  
adjustable headrest or head restraint,  
raise it. See Head Restraints on page 1-2.  
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether  
according to the child restraint instructions  
and the following instructions:  
instructions and the instructions in this manual.  
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired  
seating position.  
If the position you are  
using does not have a  
headrest or head restraint  
and you are using a  
single tether, route the  
tether over the seatback.  
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on  
the child restraint to the lower anchors.  
1-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the position you are using  
does not have a headrest  
or head restraint and you  
are using a dual tether,  
route the tether over the  
seatback.  
If the position you are using  
has an adjustable headrest  
or head restraint and you  
are using a dual tether  
route the tether under the  
headrest or head restraint  
and in between the  
headrest or head restraint  
on page 1-2.  
If the position you are  
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
using has an adjustable  
headrest or head restraint  
and you are using a single  
tether, route the tether  
under the headrest or head  
restraint and in between the  
headrest or head restraint  
on page 1-2.  
1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached.  
Securing a Child Restraint in a  
Rear Seat Position  
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,  
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child  
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the  
instructions that came with the child restraint.  
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as  
the instructions say.  
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating  
position, study the instructions that came with the  
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this  
vehicle.  
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower  
for how and where to install the child restraint using  
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using  
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors  
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 for top  
tether anchor locations.  
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed  
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the  
Restraint on page 1-42.  
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top  
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the  
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that  
come with the child restraint say that the top strap  
must be anchored.  
1-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  
the retractor to set the lock.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that  
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if  
necessary.  
1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child  
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the  
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and  
more information.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle  
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.  
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,  
disconnect it.  
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Right Front Seat Position  
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to  
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to  
Put the Restraint on page 1-42.  
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap  
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back  
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing  
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee  
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten  
the belt.  
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system  
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger  
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag  
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing  
Indicator on page 3-32 for more information, including  
important safety information.  
1-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a  
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because  
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the  
airbag deploys.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear  
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint  
in a rear seat.  
{ CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger  
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the  
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child  
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger  
seat is in a forward position.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66  
for additional information.  
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see  
page 1-44 for how and where to install the child restraint  
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a  
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors  
top tether anchor locations.  
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no  
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that  
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though it is turned off.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top  
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the  
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come  
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be  
anchored.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached.  
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the  
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that  
came with the child restraint.  
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before  
securing the forward-facing child restraint.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator  
on the passenger airbag status indicator should  
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See  
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that  
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if  
necessary.  
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
1-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  
the retractor to set the lock.  
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap  
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back  
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing  
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee  
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten  
the belt.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger  
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the  
vehicle is started.  
1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child  
Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on  
page 1-66 for more information.  
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word  
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label  
near the deployment opening.  
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the  
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and  
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle  
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.  
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word  
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest  
to the door.  
Airbag System  
The vehicle has the following airbags:  
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear  
along the headliner or trim.  
A frontal airbag for the driver.  
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.  
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.  
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection  
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags  
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury  
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate  
very quickly to do their job.  
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front  
passenger.  
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger  
seated directly behind the driver.  
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and  
the passenger seated directly behind the right  
front passenger.  
1-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are the most important things to know about the  
airbag system:  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink  
of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close  
to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously  
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to  
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on  
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety  
belts help keep you in position before and during a  
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with  
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as  
possible while still maintaining control of the  
vehicle.  
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if  
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you  
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with  
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags  
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some  
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See  
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps  
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the  
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are  
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.  
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt  
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that  
person.  
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the  
door or side windows in seating positions with  
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail  
airbags.  
1-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system checks the airbag electrical system for  
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical  
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31  
for more information.  
{ CAUTION:  
Children who are up against, or very close to, any  
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured  
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer  
protection for adults and older children, but not for  
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s  
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed  
for them. Young children and infants need the  
protection that a child restraint system can provide.  
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.  
To read how, see Older Children on page 1-32 or  
Where Are the Airbags?  
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the  
steering wheel.  
There is an airbag readiness light on the  
instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag  
symbol.  
1-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar  
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the  
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.  
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and  
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks  
closest to the door.  
1-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,  
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force  
the object into that person causing severe injury or  
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must  
be kept clear. Do not put anything between an  
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put  
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near  
any other airbag covering.  
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation  
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.  
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with  
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down  
through any door or window opening. If you do, the  
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.  
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar  
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,  
and second row outboard passengers are in the  
ceiling above the side windows.  
1-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.  
When Should an Airbag Inflate?  
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle  
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.  
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to  
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the  
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right  
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only  
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined  
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used  
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the  
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.  
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.  
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash  
severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which  
help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate  
frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For  
moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a  
level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal  
impacts, full deployment occurs.  
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not  
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends  
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and  
how quickly your vehicle slows down.  
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and  
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-58.  
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are  
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.  
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate  
if the crash severity is above the system’s designed  
threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific  
vehicle design.  
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.  
For example:  
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags  
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the  
vehicle hits a moving object.  
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags  
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the  
vehicle hits an object that does not deform.  
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if  
the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).  
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are  
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal  
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side  
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the  
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended  
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.  
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if  
the vehicle goes straight into the object.  
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag  
should have inflated simply because of the damage to  
a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.  
1-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the  
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the  
vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and  
roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the  
location and severity of the side impact.  
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety  
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact  
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping  
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact  
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact  
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.  
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,  
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward  
on page 1-63 for more information.  
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an  
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the  
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the  
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,  
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag  
module.  
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more  
than a supplement to safety belts.  
What Will You See After an Airbag  
Inflates?  
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the  
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with  
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag  
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to  
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are  
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the  
side windows that have occupant seating positions.  
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact  
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some  
people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail  
airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some  
time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag  
module may be hot for several minutes. For location of  
the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
on page 1-64.  
How Does an Airbag Restrain?  
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,  
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel  
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side  
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside  
of the vehicle.  
1-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you  
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be  
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the  
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the  
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to  
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving  
the vehicle.  
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,  
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional  
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front  
passenger airbag.  
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an  
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the  
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag  
system will not be there to help protect you in another  
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and  
possibly other parts. The service manual for your  
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.  
{ CAUTION:  
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the  
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for  
people with a history of asthma or other breathing  
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle  
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you  
have breathing problems but cannot get out of the  
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air  
by opening a window or a door. If you experience  
breathing problems following an airbag deployment,  
you should seek medical attention.  
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic  
module which records information after a crash.  
page 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.  
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag  
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag  
system will not work properly. See your dealer/  
retailer for service.  
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock  
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard  
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can  
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the  
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for  
those features.  
1-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system turns off the right front  
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact  
airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags and  
the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger  
sensing system.  
Passenger Sensing System  
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the  
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag  
status indicator will be visible on the instrument  
panel when the vehicle is started.  
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that  
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors  
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated  
occupant and determine if the right front passenger  
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag  
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer when  
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child  
restraint for their weight and size.  
United States  
Canada  
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,  
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing  
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child  
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,  
who are large enough, using safety belts.  
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, are  
visible during the system check. If you are using remote  
start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distance, you  
may not see the system check. When the system check is  
complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for  
on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status  
Indicator on page 3-32.  
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to  
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
1-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off  
the right front passenger airbag and seat-mounted  
side impact airbag if:  
{ CAUTION:  
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger  
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the  
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child  
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger  
seat is in a forward position.  
The system determines that an infant is present in  
a rear-facing infant seat.  
The system determines that a small child is present  
in a child restraint.  
The system determines that a small child is present  
in a booster seat.  
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of  
the seat for a period of time.  
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), no  
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an  
airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a  
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown  
child restraints.  
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag  
system or the passenger sensing system.  
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,  
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in  
a rear seat.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the  
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted  
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit  
to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger  
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-32.  
1-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on  
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system  
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in  
the right front passenger seat.  
{ CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and  
stays on, it means that something may be wrong  
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to  
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right  
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31  
for more information, including important safety  
information.  
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the  
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay  
lit to remind you that the airbags are active.  
For some children who have outgrown child restraints  
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system  
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal  
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending  
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.  
Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints  
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there  
is an airbag for that person.  
1-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle  
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and  
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure  
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child  
restraint into the seat cushion.  
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child  
Restraint  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit:  
1. Turn the vehicle off.  
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped  
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,  
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints  
on page 1-2.  
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.  
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as  
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or  
seat massagers.  
6. Restart the vehicle.  
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions  
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and  
Seat Position on page 1-54.  
If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in  
a child restraint, secure the child restraint in a  
rear seat position in the vehicle and see your  
dealer/retailer.  
1-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the  
system to detect that person and enable the right front  
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side  
impact airbag:  
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an  
Adult-Size Occupant  
1. Turn the vehicle off.  
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such  
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or  
seat massagers.  
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.  
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on  
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.  
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in  
this position for two to three minutes after the on  
indicator is lit.  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front  
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be  
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.  
1-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Factors Affecting System  
Operation  
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped  
Vehicle  
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the  
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps  
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger  
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in  
the Index for additional information about the importance  
of proper restraint use.  
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.  
There are parts of the airbag system in several places  
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the  
service manual have information about servicing the  
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service  
on page 7-16.  
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or  
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,  
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the  
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend  
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket  
{ CAUTION:  
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific  
Vehicle on page 1-72 for more information about  
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off  
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still  
inflate during improper service. You can be injured  
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid  
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the  
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service  
procedures, and make sure the person performing  
work for you is qualified to do so.  
modifications that can affect how the system operates.  
{ CAUTION:  
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or  
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback  
may interfere with the proper operation of the  
passenger sensing system.  
1-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also  
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing  
system. This could either prevent proper deployment  
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger  
sensing system from properly turning off the  
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing  
System on page 1-66.  
Adding Equipment to Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle  
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change  
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags  
from working properly?  
If you have any questions about this, you should  
contact Customer Assistance before you modify  
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses  
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of  
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.  
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s  
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side  
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from  
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of  
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and  
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,  
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar  
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side  
impact sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the  
operation of the airbag system.  
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get  
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether  
this will affect my airbag system?  
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing  
system for the right front passenger’s position, which  
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s  
seat. The passenger sensing system may not  
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced  
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM  
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different  
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat  
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,  
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.  
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer  
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer  
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See  
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual  
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,  
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.  
1-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Airbags  
Restraint System Check  
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled  
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag  
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 3-31 for more information.  
Checking the Restraint Systems  
Safety Belts  
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,  
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not  
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any  
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag  
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the  
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an  
Airbag Inflate? on page 1-64. See your dealer/retailer  
for service.  
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,  
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and  
anchorages are all working properly.  
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system  
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing  
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn  
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.  
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn  
or frayed, get a new one right away.  
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.  
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30 for more  
information.  
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety  
Belts on page 5-93.  
1-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new  
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.  
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any  
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your  
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies  
inspected or replaced.  
{ CAUTION:  
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being  
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH  
system parts.  
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your  
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not  
properly protect the person using it, resulting in  
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help  
make sure your restraint systems are working  
properly after a crash, have them inspected and  
any necessary replacements made as soon as  
possible.  
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the  
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not  
being used at the time of the crash.  
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag  
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier  
in this section.  
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle  
has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light stays  
on after the vehicle is started, or while you are driving.  
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31.  
1-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 2  
Features and Controls  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-19  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys  
{ CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key  
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others  
could be badly injured or even killed. They could  
operate the power windows or other controls or  
even make the vehicle move. The windows will  
function with the keys in the ignition and children  
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the  
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in  
a vehicle with children.  
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.  
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer  
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.  
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.  
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,  
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.  
Be sure you have spare keys.  
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside  
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on  
page 7-7.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System  
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,  
try this:  
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject  
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules  
and with Industry Canada.  
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far  
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy  
weather.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be  
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or  
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery  
Replacement” later in this section.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
If the transmitter is still not working correctly,  
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician  
for service.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this  
feature, press to operate the remote start feature.  
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional  
information.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System Operation  
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions  
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.  
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior  
lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabled  
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the remote  
lock feedback can be programmed to have the horn  
chirp and/or the turn signals flash to confirm locking.  
See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC  
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-50 for more  
information.  
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4.  
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent  
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.  
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.  
Press K again within five seconds to unlock all  
remaining doors. The interior lamps turn on and  
stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.  
If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback  
can be programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the  
turn signals flash to confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK  
HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 3-50 for more information.  
With Remote Start  
Shown, Without Remote  
Start Similar  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The high-beam headlamps, parking lamps, and  
Programming Transmitters to the  
Vehicle  
back-up lamps may come on each time K is pressed.  
See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 3-50 for additional information.  
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle  
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement  
can be purchased and programmed through your  
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is  
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters  
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters  
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.  
Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters  
programmed to it.  
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content  
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on  
page 2-18.  
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for  
about one second to unlock the trunk. The trunk can be  
opened with the transmitter when the vehicle speed  
is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) or when the ignition is off.  
Battery Replacement  
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release  
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times  
and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.  
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery)  
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT  
(Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-46 for additional information.  
Press and hold L for about three seconds to initiate  
the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps  
and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press L again  
to cancel the panic alarm.  
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch  
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static  
from your body could damage the transmitter.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Vehicle Start  
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that  
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.  
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning  
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote  
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic  
climate control system, it will automatically regulate  
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these  
systems will return after the ignition key is turned  
to ON/RUN.  
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of  
remote starters. For example, some laws may require  
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in  
view when doing so. Check local regulations for  
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.  
To replace the battery:  
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low  
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.  
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object  
inserted into the notch on the side.  
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE  
transmitter functions will have an increased range  
of operation. However, the range may be less while  
the vehicle is running.  
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.  
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.  
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.  
4. Snap the transmitter back together.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional  
information.  
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been  
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still  
running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes  
from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.  
The remote start running time can be extended one time  
and only after the first remote start.  
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE  
transmitter if you have remote start.  
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert  
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.  
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:  
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.  
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,  
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle’s  
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to  
ON/RUN.  
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,  
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s  
remote start button for about four seconds or until the  
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors will lock.  
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the  
following.  
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on  
and remain on while the engine is running.  
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press  
and release the remote start button.  
The remote start feature provides two separate starts  
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine running  
time, or one start with a time extension. The first start  
must expire or be canceled to get two separate 10 minute  
starts.  
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position  
and then back to LOCK/OFF.  
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After the engine has been started two times, or one  
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must be  
turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote start  
procedure can be used again. See Ignition Positions on  
page 2-22 for information regarding the ignition positions  
on your vehicle.  
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are  
shipped from the factory with the remote start system  
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled  
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC  
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-50 for additional  
information.  
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any  
of the follow occur:  
Remote Start Ready  
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start  
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.  
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the  
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.  
The remote start system is disabled through  
the DIC.  
The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.  
The vehicle’s hood is open.  
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the  
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your  
vehicle.  
The hazard warning flashers are on.  
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38.  
The engine coolant temperature is too high.  
The oil pressure is low.  
Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time  
extension, have already been provided for that  
ignition cycle.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.  
Doors and Locks  
From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s door  
lock counterclockwise to lock the door and clockwise to  
unlock it or use the remote keyless entry transmitter.  
Door Locks  
From the inside, move the manual lock control on  
the door or use the power door lock switch.  
{ CAUTION:  
Power Door Locks  
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.  
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are  
located on the front doors.  
Passengers, especially children, can easily  
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.  
When a door is locked, the handle will not open  
it. The chance of being thrown out of the  
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are  
not locked. So, all passengers should wear  
safety belts properly and the doors should  
be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.  
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles  
may be unable to get out. A child can be  
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer  
permanent injuries or even death from heat  
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever  
leaving it.  
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.  
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press  
to lock the doors.  
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked  
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.  
Locking your doors can help prevent this from  
happening.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Door Ajar Reminder  
Programmable Automatic Door  
Locks  
A chime will sound and the DOOR AJAR message  
will display if one of the doors is not fully closed.  
This happens when the ignition is on and the shift  
lever is moved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral).  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.  
The vehicle is programmed to lock all doors  
automatically when the following are met:  
All doors are closed.  
The ignition is on.  
Delayed Locking  
The vehicle is shifted out of (P) Park.  
This feature cannot be disabled.  
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors  
and arming of the theft-deterrent system for five seconds  
when the power door lock switch or remote keyless  
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.  
All doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into  
(P) Park.  
The power door unlock function can be programmed  
through prompts displayed on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization on  
page 3-50.  
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three  
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking  
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door  
is closed, all of the doors will lock. To cancel the delay  
and lock the doors immediately, press the lock button  
on the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power  
door lock switch a second time. The theft deterrent  
system will arm after 30 seconds.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear Door Security Locks  
Lockout Protection  
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is  
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will lock  
and then the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove  
the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.  
The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent  
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.  
Open the rear doors to  
access the security locks  
on the inside edge of  
each door.  
If the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock  
the doors while the key is in the ignition, a chime  
will sound three times. All doors will then lock.  
Trunk  
Press the trunk release button on the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter for one second to open the  
trunk from the outside.  
{ CAUTION:  
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to  
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened from  
the outside with the door unlocked. To return the door to  
normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical position.  
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven  
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any  
objects that pass through the seal between the  
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust  
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be  
seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness  
and even death.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Trunk Release  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Press the button located  
on the driver door near  
the map pocket to open  
the trunk.  
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or  
trunk/hatch open:  
Close all of the windows.  
Fully open the air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel.  
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting  
that brings in only outside air and set the fan  
speed to the highest setting. See Climate  
Control System in the Index.  
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,  
disable the power liftgate function.  
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is in  
P (Park) or when the ignition is off.  
For more information about carbon monoxide, see  
Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trunk Assist Handle  
Emergency Trunk Release Handle  
There is an assist handle  
located on the inside of  
the trunk.  
Use the assist handle to lower the trunk lid. The TRUNK  
AJAR message will appear if the trunk is not properly  
closed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46  
for more information.  
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release  
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing  
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.  
The emergency trunk release handle is only intended  
to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling  
them to open the trunk from the inside.  
Notice: Using the trunk assist handle as a tie-down  
or anchor point when securing items in the trunk  
may damage it. Use the trunk assist handle only to  
help you close the trunk lid.  
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release  
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.  
This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the  
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows  
{ CAUTION:  
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a  
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.  
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and  
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat  
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a  
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows  
closed in warm or hot weather.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express-Up Window  
Power Windows  
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the  
second position and release the switch to activate  
the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is going  
up, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.  
Programming the Power Windows  
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,  
disconnected, or is not working, the driver power window  
will need to be re-programmed for the express-up  
feature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’s  
battery before reprogramming.  
To program the driver window, follow these steps:  
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or  
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,  
close all doors.  
The power window switches are located on the armrest  
on the driver’s door. In addition, there is a switch on  
each passenger door.  
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the  
window is fully open.  
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is  
fully closed.  
Express-Down Window  
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately  
two seconds after the window is completely  
closed.  
The driver window has an express-down feature. This  
switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front all the way down  
and release, to automatically lower.  
The window is now reprogrammed.  
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of  
the switch momentarily. To raise the window, pull  
and hold the front of the switch.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature  
Window Lockout  
If any object is in the path of the window when  
the express-up is active, the window stops at the  
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.  
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also  
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window returns  
to normal operation once the obstruction or condition  
is removed.  
The driver power window controls also include a lockout  
button.  
o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout button to stop  
the rear passengers from using their window switches.  
The driver and front passenger can still operate all the  
windows with the lock on. When the red part of the switch  
is visible, you have returned to normal window operation.  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override  
Sun Visors  
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.  
You can also remove them from the center mount and  
swing them to the side, to block out glare from the side.  
{ CAUTION:  
If express override is activated, the window will  
not reverse automatically. You or others could be  
injured and the window could be damaged. Before  
you use express override, make sure that all people  
and obstructions are clear of the window path.  
Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors  
located on the passenger and driver’s side visor.  
When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.  
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be  
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window  
switch all the way up to the second position. The window  
rises for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch  
is released, the express mode is re-activated.  
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in  
its path. Use care when using the override mode.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The security light, located on the instrument panel  
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been  
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light  
flashes once every three seconds.  
Theft-Deterrent Systems  
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.  
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,  
they do not make it impossible to steal.  
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this  
means that a door is open.  
Content Theft-Deterrent  
If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock the  
vehicle, the alarm will be activated.  
Your vehicle may have a  
content theft-deterrent  
alarm system.  
If you do not want to arm the content theft system,  
lock the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doors  
or with the inside power door lock switches.  
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash if  
any door is opened while armed.  
Disarming the System  
To disarm the system, do one of the following:  
Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.  
Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.  
Arming the System  
With the ignition off, press the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button to arm the system.  
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop  
flashing.  
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors  
are closed, or 60 seconds with any door open.  
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second  
time while all the doors are closed, the system will arm  
immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds if a  
door is open. When the open door is closed, the system  
will arm.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic  
Immobilizer  
How the System Alarm is Activated  
To activate the system if it is armed:  
Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten second  
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a  
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.  
Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and lights  
will immediately sound for thirty seconds.  
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio  
frequency subject to Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start  
feature, it will activate the full alarm.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
When an alarm event has finished, the system will  
re-arm itself automatically.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
How to Turn Off the System Alarm  
To turn off the system alarm:  
Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.  
The system will then re-arm itself.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.  
This will also disarm the system.  
Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.  
This will also disarm the system.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
How to Detect a Tamper Condition  
If three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock button  
is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means that the  
content theft security system alarm was previously  
triggered.  
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in  
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic  
Immobilizer Operation  
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized  
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.  
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.  
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears  
to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,  
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses on  
page 5-99. If the engine still does not start with the other  
key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start,  
the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who  
can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.  
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.  
The system is automatically armed when the key  
is removed from the ignition.  
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.  
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to  
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement  
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.  
The following procedure is for programming additional  
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost  
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a  
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys  
made and programmed to the system.  
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.  
The security light will come on if there is a problem  
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.  
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone  
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from  
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start  
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high  
number of electrical key codes.  
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut  
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.  
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not  
start and the security light on the instrument panel  
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your  
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program the new key:  
Starting and Operating Your  
Vehicle  
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.  
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition  
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,  
see your dealer/retailer for service.  
New Vehicle Break-In  
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to  
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.  
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate  
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if  
you follow these guidelines:  
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the  
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original  
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.  
Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast  
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).  
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid  
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.  
The security light will turn off once the key has  
been programmed.  
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to  
be programmed.  
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles  
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake  
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with  
new linings can mean premature wear and earlier  
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline  
every time you get new brake linings.  
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on  
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if  
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,  
is not working properly and must be serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the  
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.  
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see  
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.  
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing  
a Trailer on page 4-29 for the trailer towing  
capabilities of your vehicle and more  
information.  
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be  
gradually increased.  
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or  
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the  
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break  
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the  
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key  
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.  
Ignition Positions  
The ignition switch has  
four different positions.  
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also  
locks the transmission. The key can only be removed  
in LOCK/OFF.  
The shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition  
switch to LOCK/OFF.  
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.  
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right  
to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.  
If this doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.  
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN  
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be  
applied.  
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use  
things like the radio and windshield wipers while  
the engine is not running.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the  
electrical accessories and to display some instrument  
panel warning lights. The switch will stay in this position  
while the engine is running.  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to  
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:  
Audio System  
Power Windows  
Heated Seats (if equipped)  
Sunroof (if equipped)  
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after  
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.  
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or  
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could  
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle  
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period  
of time.  
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the  
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will  
return to the ON/RUN position for driving.  
The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof will  
work until any door is opened.  
The radio continues to work until the driver door is  
opened.  
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened,  
the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and  
the key is in the ignition.  
All these features operate when the key is in the  
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the engine does not start and the key is held in  
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds  
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear  
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the  
engine is already running. Engine cranking can be  
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/  
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.  
Starting the Engine  
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).  
The engine will not start in any other position.  
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already  
moving, use N (Neutral) only.  
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the  
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage  
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the  
vehicle is stopped.  
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of  
time, by returning the key to the START position  
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat  
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the  
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,  
to let the cranking motor cool down.  
Starting Procedure  
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the  
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of  
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine  
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after  
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission  
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all  
moving parts.  
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,  
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or 18°C),  
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.  
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to  
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key  
in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.  
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow  
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine  
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle  
starts briefly but then stops again, repeat these  
steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.  
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.  
Operate the engine and transmission gently until the  
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.  
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking  
System. This feature assists in starting the engine  
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned  
to the START position, and then released when the  
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue  
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the  
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts  
or accessories, you could change the way the engine  
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check  
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine  
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage  
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
{ CAUTION:  
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could  
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of  
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.  
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a  
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.  
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty  
three-prong extension cord rated for at least  
15 amps.  
Engine Coolant Heater  
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting  
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold  
weather conditions at or below 0°F (18°C). Vehicles  
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at  
least four hours before starting the vehicle. An internal  
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will  
prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures  
above 0°F (18°C).  
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC  
outlet.  
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and  
store the cord as it was before to keep it away  
from moving engine parts and prevent damage.  
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater  
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in  
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the  
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best  
advice on this.  
1. Turn off the engine.  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.  
On the 2.4L engine, the engine coolant heater cord  
is located near the air cleaner box on the passenger  
side of the engine compartment. On the 3.5L and  
3.6L V6 engines, the engine coolant heater cord is  
located on the driver side around the battery box.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16  
for more information on location.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transmission Operation  
(Four Speed Transmission)  
{ CAUTION:  
The automatic  
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift  
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake  
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.  
transmission has  
a shift lever located  
on the console between  
the seats.  
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is  
running unless you have to. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.  
You or others could be injured. To be sure the  
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly  
level ground, always set the parking brake and  
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into  
Park on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see  
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.  
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the  
best position to use when you start the engine because  
the vehicle cannot move easily.  
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before  
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic  
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully  
apply the brake pedal and then press the shift lever  
button before you can shift from P (Park) when the  
ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of  
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever, then push  
the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain  
brake application. Then press the shift lever button and  
move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of  
Park on page 2-34.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.  
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with  
the engine running at high speed may damage the  
transmission. The repairs would not be covered  
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not  
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.  
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is  
moving forward could damage the transmission.  
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle  
is stopped.  
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides  
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for  
passing, and you are:  
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,  
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see  
on page 4-19.  
Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push the  
accelerator pedal about halfway down.  
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the  
accelerator all the way down.  
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not  
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when  
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.  
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.  
Notice: If the vehicle seems to start up rather  
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and  
you continue to drive the vehicle that way, you could  
damage the transmission. Have the vehicle serviced  
right away. You can drive in L2 (Low) when you are  
driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and D (Drive) for  
higher speeds until then.  
{ CAUTION:  
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is  
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your  
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could  
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit  
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear  
while the engine is running at high speed.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal  
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using  
the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle  
would otherwise accelerate. If constant upshifting or  
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, this  
position can be used to prevent repetitive types of shifts.  
You might choose I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive)  
when driving on hilly, winding roads and when towing a  
trailer, so that there is less shifting between gears.  
Automatic Transmission Operation  
(Six Speed Transmission)  
The automatic transmission  
has a shift lever located  
on the console between  
the seats.  
L (Low): This position gives you access to 4 (Fourth),  
3 (Third), 2 (Second) and 1 (First) gear ranges.  
This provides more engine braking but lower fuel  
economy than D (Drive). You can use it on very steep  
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the electronic range  
select is put in L (Low), the transmission will not shift  
into lower gears until the vehicle is going slow enough.  
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the  
best position to use when you start the engine because  
the vehicle cannot move easily.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before  
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic  
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully  
apply the brake pedal then press the shift lever button  
before you can shift from P (Park) while the ignition key  
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease  
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all  
the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application.  
Then move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting  
Out of Park on page 2-34.  
{ CAUTION:  
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift  
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake  
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.  
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is  
running unless you have to. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.  
You or others could be injured. To be sure the  
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly  
level ground, always set the parking brake and  
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into  
Park on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see  
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.  
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.  
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is  
moving forward could damage the transmission.  
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle  
is stopped.  
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,  
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If  
page 4-19.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not  
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when  
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.  
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.  
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides  
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for  
passing, and you are:  
Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push the  
accelerator pedal about halfway down.  
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the  
accelerator all the way down.  
{ CAUTION:  
M (Manual Mode): This position, allows you to change  
gears similar to a manual transmission. If the vehicle  
has this feature, see Driver Shift Control (DSC).  
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is  
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your  
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could  
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit  
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear  
while the engine is running at high speed.  
Driver Shift Control (DSC)  
To use this feature, do the following:  
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) rearward to  
M (Manual).  
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with  
the engine running at high speed may damage the  
transmission. The repairs would not be covered  
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not  
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.  
While driving in manual mode, the transmission will  
remain in the driver selected gear. When coming  
to a stop in the manual position, the vehicle  
will automatically shift into 1 (First) gear.  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears  
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions  
per minute (RPM):  
The transmission will not automatically shift to the  
next higher gear if the vehicle speed or engine  
RPM is too low.  
The transmission will not allow shifting to the next  
lower gear if the vehicle speed or engine RPM is  
too high.  
Second or Third Gear Start Feature  
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and  
icy conditions, you may want to shift the gear select tap  
switch into Second or Third gear. A higher gear allows  
you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces.  
2. Press the + (plus) paddle located on top of  
the steering wheel controls forward to upshift,  
or push the backside of the shift paddle rearward  
to downshift.  
With the DSC feature, the vehicle can be set to pull  
away in Second or Third gear.  
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) into the  
M (Manual Mode).  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) in the instrument  
cluster will change from the currently displayed message  
to the letter “M”, For Manual position, and a number  
indicating the requested gear range when moving  
the shift lever forward or rearward.  
2. With the vehicle stopped, press (+) end of the  
button to select Second or Third gear. The vehicle  
will start from a stop position in Second or Third gear.  
3. Once moving select the desired drive gear.  
While using the DSC feature the transmission will have  
firmer shifting and sportier performance. You can use  
this for sport driving or when climbing hills to stay in gear  
longer or to downshift for more power or engine braking.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the pedal release. If the parking brake is not released  
when you begin to drive, the brake system warning light  
comes on and a chime sounds as a warning that the  
parking brake is still on.  
Parking Brake  
To set the parking brake,  
push down the parking  
brake pedal with your left  
foot. If the ignition is on, the  
brake system warning light  
will come on. See Brake  
page 3-34.  
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also display  
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) as a reminder  
to release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-46.  
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can  
overheat the brake system and cause premature  
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure  
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake  
warning light is off before driving.  
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see  
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.  
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake  
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily  
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you feel  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine  
Running  
Shifting Into Park  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the  
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking  
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have  
left the engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be  
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are  
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.  
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer  
on page 4-29.  
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the  
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if  
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking  
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with  
the engine running, it could overheat and even  
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not  
leave the vehicle with the engine running.  
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,  
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is  
firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the  
shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal  
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away  
from P (Park) without first pushing the button.  
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking  
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more  
information.  
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the  
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever  
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.  
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully  
locked in P (Park).  
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.  
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can  
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your  
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on  
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into  
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press  
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the  
gear you wish.  
Torque Lock  
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts  
too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.  
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the  
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it  
is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock,  
set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find  
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” listed previously.  
Parking Over Things That Burn  
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be  
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking  
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).  
{ CAUTION:  
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust  
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park  
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things  
that can burn.  
Shifting Out of Park  
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock  
control system. You have to apply the brake pedal then  
press the shift lever button before you can shift from  
page 2-28.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Exhaust  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been  
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.  
There are holes or openings in the  
{ CAUTION:  
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)  
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO  
can cause unconsciousness and even death.  
vehicle body from damage or after-market  
modifications that are not completely sealed.  
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected  
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:  
Drive it only with the windows  
completely down.  
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.  
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:  
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation  
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that  
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).  
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or  
different.  
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an  
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that  
has no fresh air ventilation.  
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or  
damage.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running the Vehicle While Parked  
{ CAUTION:  
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you  
ever have to, here are some things to know.  
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle  
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not  
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.  
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when  
the engine is running unless you have to. If you  
have left the engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be  
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are  
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake  
and move the shift lever to P (Park).  
{ CAUTION:  
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor  
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may  
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon  
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.  
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.  
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that  
has no fresh air ventilation. For more information,  
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.  
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not  
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-33.  
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a  
Trailer on page 4-29.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror  
Mirrors  
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside  
rearview mirror with a compass display and OnStar®  
controls. See your dealer/retailer for more information  
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.  
See OnStar® System on page 2-40 for more information  
about the services OnStar® provides.  
Manual Rearview Mirror  
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it  
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror  
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the tab  
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.  
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on  
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control  
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your  
dealer/retailer for more information on the system  
and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® System  
on page 2-40 for more information about the services  
OnStar® provides.  
or off.  
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation  
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from  
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and  
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is  
started.  
Cleaning the Mirror  
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.  
Use a soft towel dampened with water.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To adjust for compass variance:  
Compass  
1. Find your current location and variance zone  
number on the zone map that follows.  
Compass Operation  
Press O to turn the compass display on or off.  
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,  
the compass displays the current compass direction  
after a few seconds.  
Compass Calibration  
If after a few seconds the display does not show a  
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may  
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.  
Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna  
mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C  
appears in the compass window, the compass may need  
to be reset or calibrated.  
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle very  
slowly, in circles, until the display reads a direction.  
Compass Variance  
2. Press and hold O until a zone number displays.  
The mirror is set in zone eight. It is necessary to adjust  
the compass to compensate for compass variance if  
the vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Under certain  
circumstances, such as a long distance, cross-country  
trip, it is necessary to adjust the compass variance.  
3. Once the zone number displays, press O  
repeatedly until the correct zone number is reached.  
If C appears in the compass window, the compass  
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”  
listed previously.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you have these controls,  
they are located on the  
driver door.  
Outside Power Mirrors  
You may have one of the following power mirror  
controls:  
If you have these controls,  
they are located near the  
driver side mirror.  
Use the selector switch located below the four-way  
control panel to choose either the left or right outside  
mirror. Then press the control pad to move the selected  
mirror in the desired direction.  
To maximize the viewing area, adjust each mirror so  
you can see the side of your vehicle and the area beside  
and behind your vehicle.  
1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch  
located above the control pad, to select the driver  
or passenger mirror.  
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror  
If the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirror  
adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind your vehicle.  
This feature is controlled by the on and off settings  
on the automatic dimming inside rearview mirror.  
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control  
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is  
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to  
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.  
Outside Heated Mirrors  
For vehicles with heated mirrors:  
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms  
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber  
glove box literature.  
< (Rear Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors.  
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Automatic Climate  
Control System on page 3-24 for more information.  
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen  
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until  
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the  
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or  
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan  
is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,  
including airbag notification and emergency services,  
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more  
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),  
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.  
OnStar® System  
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.  
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services  
described below, or for a full description of OnStar  
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s  
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or  
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the  
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours  
a day, 7 days a week.  
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live  
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,  
information, and convenience services. If the airbags  
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic  
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request  
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys  
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar  
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for  
60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar Services Available with the  
Safe & Sound Plan  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar  
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice  
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the  
vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute  
Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good  
for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked to  
a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell  
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.  
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in  
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or  
speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar  
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).  
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment  
Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)  
(If equipped)  
Link to Emergency Services  
Roadside Assistance  
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance  
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert  
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email  
GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes  
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)  
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation  
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation  
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.  
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor  
locate a business or address and download driving  
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the  
desired destination will play through the audio system  
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more  
information.  
OnStar Services Included with  
Directions & Connections Plan  
All Safe and Sound Plan Services  
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or  
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered  
RideAssist  
Information and Convenience Services  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar Virtual Advisor  
How OnStar Service Works  
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar  
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access  
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and  
stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a  
few simple voice commands to browse through the  
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for  
more information. This feature is only available in  
the continental U.S.  
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle  
information. This information is automatically sent to an  
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,  
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or  
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes  
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,  
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle  
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle  
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar  
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends  
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide  
services where it is located.  
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls  
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can  
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.  
for more information.  
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a  
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless  
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service  
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where  
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that  
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when  
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible  
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available  
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,  
or at all times.  
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to  
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone  
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more  
information.  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Location information about the vehicle is only available  
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and  
available.  
Universal Home Remote  
System  
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,  
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar  
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar  
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing  
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some  
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle  
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or  
wireless phone network congestion.  
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to  
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)  
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage  
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Your Responsibility  
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor  
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is  
red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press  
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the  
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar  
subscription has expired and all services have been  
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that the  
OnStar equipment is active.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not use this system with any garage door opener  
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.  
This includes any garage door opener model  
manufactured before April 1, 1982.  
Universal Home Remote System  
Operation (With Three Round LED)  
Read the instructions completely before attempting to  
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,  
it may be helpful to have another person assist with  
programming the transmitter.  
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter  
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future  
programming. Only the original remote control  
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.  
The programmed buttons should be erased when the  
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing Universal  
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.  
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote  
System. If there are three round Light Emitting  
Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal  
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.  
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when  
programming a garage door. Be sure that people  
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate  
that is being programmed.  
This system provides a way to replace up to three  
remote control transmitters used to activate devices  
such as garage door openers, security systems,  
and home automation devices.  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Universal Home  
Remote — Rolling Code  
For questions or help programming the Universal  
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go  
to learcar2u.com.  
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling  
Code units.  
Programming a garage door opener involves  
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure  
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out  
and the procedure will have to be repeated.  
To program up to three devices:  
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener  
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or  
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the  
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head  
unit and may be a colored button. Press this button.  
After pressing this button, complete the following  
steps in less than 30 seconds.  
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold  
the Universal Home Remote button that will be used  
to control the garage door until the garage door  
moves. The indicator light, above the selected  
button, should slowly blink. This button may need  
to be held for up to 20 seconds.  
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside  
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,  
and immediately release them.  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button  
when the garage door moves. The indicator light  
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.  
To program up to three devices:  
5. Press and release the same button again.  
The garage door should move, confirming  
that programming is successful and complete.  
To program another Rolling Code device such as an  
additional garage door opener, a security device,  
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,  
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than  
what was used for the garage door opener.  
If these instructions do not work, the garage door  
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the  
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code  
garage door opener.  
Programming Universal Home  
Remote — Fixed Code  
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed  
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand  
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the  
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip  
switches similar to the graphic above, the garage  
door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not  
see a row of dip switches, return to the previous  
section for Programming Universal Home  
For questions or help programming the Universal  
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to  
learcar2u.com.  
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed  
Code units.  
Remote – Rolling Code.  
Programming a garage door opener involves  
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure  
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out  
and the procedure will have to be repeated.  
Your hand held transmitter can have between  
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand  
of transmitter.  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)  
could also have a row of dip switches that can  
be used when programming the Universal Home  
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor  
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the  
dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch  
settings on the motor head unit to program the  
Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch  
settings can also be used when the original hand  
held transmitter is not available.  
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions  
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as  
they do in the examples above, but they should  
be similar.  
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter  
could be labeled, as follows:  
A switch in the up position could be labeled as  
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”  
A switch in the down position could be labeled  
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions  
as “Down,” “,” or “Off.”  
A switch in the middle position could be labeled  
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left  
to right as follows:  
When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”  
When a switch is in the down position,  
write “Right.”  
If a switch is set between the up and down  
position, write “Middle.”  
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now  
become the button strokes to be entered into the  
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to  
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2,  
in order from left to right, into the Universal Home  
Remote, when completing Step 4.  
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three  
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.  
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home  
Remote into programming mode.  
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each  
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s  
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and  
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press  
one button on the Universal Home Remote for  
each switch setting as follows:  
If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the  
vehicle.  
If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the  
vehicle.  
If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in  
the vehicle.  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,  
firmly press and release all three buttons at the  
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.  
Reprogramming Universal Home  
Remote Buttons  
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by  
repeating the instructions.  
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to  
control the garage door until the garage door  
moves. The indicator light above the selected  
button should slowly blink. This button may  
need to be held for up to 55 seconds.  
Erasing Universal Home Remote  
Buttons  
7. Immediately release the button when the garage  
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly  
until programming is complete.  
The programmed buttons should be erased when the  
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.  
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the  
Universal Home Remote device:  
8. Press and release the same button again.  
The garage door should move, confirming  
that programming is successful and complete.  
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the  
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until  
the indicator lights, located directly above the  
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.  
To program another Fixed Code device such as an  
additional garage door opener, a security device,  
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing  
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for  
the garage door opener.  
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both  
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.  
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote  
System, call the customer assistance phone number  
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.  
Using Universal Home Remote  
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half  
of a second. The indicator light will come on while  
the signal is being transmitted.  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Storage Area  
Storage Areas  
A storage area is located in front of the shift lever.  
Push the bottom of the door and the storage will  
automatically open.  
Glove Box  
Pull the handle up to open.  
Center Console Storage  
Cupholders  
The center console storage area has a storage tray  
and a main storage. Pull up on the driver side latch to  
access the storage tray. Pull up on the passenger side  
latch to access the main storage. There is a removable  
divider and may be a storage pocket located at the rear  
of the center console.  
Removable cupholders are located in front of the center  
console. See “Center Console Storage Area” following  
for how to access them. Press and hold the tab at  
the rear of the cupholders and lift up and rearward to  
remove the cupholders. This will disengage the two  
forward tabs.  
The armrest on top of the center console can be  
adjusted to a rearward, middle, and forward position.  
Pull or push the front of the armrest to adjust to  
the desired position.  
To reinstall them, place the two forward tabs into the  
slots and push the rear of the cupholder down.  
For vehicles with rear seat cupholders, pull down the  
door on the back of the center console to access them.  
Another storage area is located in front of the main  
storage. Push down and then forward on the rear of the  
cover to access. There is a storage tray and removable  
cupholders.  
Instrument Panel Storage  
An instrument panel storage area, with a removable  
liner, is located above the radio. Slide the latch toward  
the back of the vehicle to open the storage area.  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The sunroof only operates when the ignition is in  
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP) on page 2-23.  
Driver Storage Compartment  
A driver storage compartment is located near the  
left side of the steering column on the bottom of  
the instrument panel. Pull the cover down to open.  
Pull out to remove for cleaning.  
Press and release the back of the switch to open the  
sunroof to the vent position. From the vent position, press  
and release the back of the switch to express-open the  
sunroof. To stop the sunroof from express opening, press  
the switch again. If the sunshade is closed, it will open  
automatically when the sunroof opens past the vented  
position.  
Convenience Net  
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store  
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should not  
be used to store heavy loads.  
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof is  
opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof  
is closed.  
Sunroof  
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch and  
hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if  
the switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.  
On vehicles with a sunroof,  
the switch is located on  
the headliner between the  
map lamps.  
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if  
the vehicle has an electrical failure.  
Notice: Forcing the sunshade forward of the  
sliding glass panel may cause damage and the  
sunroof may not operate properly. Always close  
the glass panel before closing the sunshade.  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
Bluetooth® ...................................................3-78  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Panel Overview  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:  
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27.  
M. Horn on page 3-6.  
C. Driver Shift Control (If Equipped). Automatic  
(If Equipped).  
O. Ignition Positions on page 2-22.  
Climate Control System on page 3-24.  
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-29.  
Washer on page 3-9.  
Q. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
(Four Speed Transmission) on page 2-26 or  
Transmission) on page 2-28.  
F. Instrument Panel Storage on page 2-50.  
G. Audio System(s) on page 3-56.  
H. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-16.  
Fog Lamps on page 3-15.  
Outlet(s) on page 3-18.  
I. Driver Storage Compartment on page 2-51.  
J. Hood Release on page 5-14.  
V. Glove Box on page 2-50.  
Center (DIC) on page 3-43.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel  
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel  
be adjusted.  
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button  
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and  
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns  
others that you are having trouble.  
Press | again to turn the flashers off.  
Horn  
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering  
wheel pad to sound the horn.  
The lever is located on the left side of the steering  
column.  
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down the  
lever. Then move the steering wheel up or down or  
backward or forward into a comfortable position. Pull the  
lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
An arrow on the instrument  
panel cluster flashes in the  
direction of the turn or  
lane change.  
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.  
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash  
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until lane change  
is complete.  
The lever on the left side of the steering column  
includes the following:  
The lever returns to its starting position when it is  
released.  
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash  
rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be  
burned out.  
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
O : Exterior Lamp Control  
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,  
check the fuse. See Fuses on page 5-99.  
Flash-to-Pass.  
Information for these features is on the pages following.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
Windshield Wipers  
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,  
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.  
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if the  
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition  
is in ON/RUN.  
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,  
pull the turn signal lever toward you.  
Flash-to-Pass  
This feature lets the high-beam headlamps be used to  
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.  
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of  
the steering wheel.  
Pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you until  
the high-beam headlamps come on, then release  
the lever to turn them off.  
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.  
9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.  
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): For  
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount  
of delay time varies between wiping cycles due to the  
delay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle. As  
vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiper  
interval also increases or decreases.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for  
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn on  
automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the  
wipers are turned off.  
x (Delay): While the lever is in the intermittent  
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this  
symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longer  
delay between wiping cycles. To the left of the  
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottom to  
top, that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller  
bars mean the wipers movement is less frequent. Larger  
bars mean the movement is more frequent.  
Windshield Washer  
Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper  
lever until the washers begin.  
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.  
1 (High Speed): For wiping at a high speed.  
{ CAUTION:  
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down for a single  
wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipers  
start; then release. The wipers stop after one wiping  
cycle. Hold the lever down longer, for more wipe cycles.  
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until  
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer  
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your  
vision.  
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before  
using them.  
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the  
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume  
the previous speed.  
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully  
loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, install  
new blades.  
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit  
breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the motor gets  
stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snow or ice, and  
then turn the wipers back on.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Cruise Control  
Cruise Control  
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or  
more be maintained without keeping your foot on the  
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise  
control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).  
{ CAUTION:  
If you leave your cruise control on when you are  
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go  
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be  
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise  
control switch off until you want to use cruise  
control.  
{ CAUTION:  
Cruise control can be dangerous where you  
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not  
use the cruise control on winding roads or in  
heavy traffic.  
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.  
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can  
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose  
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The cruise control buttons  
are located on the steering  
wheel.  
To set a speed do the following:  
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator  
light on the button comes on.  
2. Get up to the desired speed.  
3. Press the SETand release it. The cruise symbol  
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the  
system is engaged.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control  
shuts off.  
I (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on  
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control  
System (TCS) or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)  
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control automatically  
disengages. See Traction Control System (TCS) on  
page 4-6. When road conditions allow, the cruise control  
can be used again.  
and off.  
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to  
accelerate the speed.  
SET(Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the  
speed.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise  
Control  
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then  
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged.  
The cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster also  
goes out indicating cruise is no longer engaged. To  
return to the previously set speed, you do not need to  
repeat the set process again. Once at a speed of about  
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly press the RES+.  
If the cruise control system is already engaged:  
Push and hold the SETuntil the desired lower  
speed is reached, then release it.  
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push  
the SET. Each time this is done, the vehicle  
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.  
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen  
speed and stays there.  
Passing Another Vehicle While Using  
Cruise Control  
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise  
Control  
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s  
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle  
slows down to the previously set cruise control speed.  
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.  
If the cruise control system is already engaged,  
press the RES+. Hold it there until the desired  
speed is reached and then release the button.  
Using Cruise Control on Hills  
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon  
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.  
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the  
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When  
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower  
gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed. When the  
brakes are applied this ends the cruise control.  
To increase the vehicle speed in very small  
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release  
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about  
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The exterior lamp control has the following four  
positions:  
Ending Cruise Control  
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:  
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking  
lamps, and taillamps.  
Step lightly on the brake pedal to disengage  
the cruise control.  
Press the on/off button, to turn off the cruise  
control.  
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps and  
taillamps only.  
Erasing Speed Memory  
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically  
turns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime,  
and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps  
at night.  
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when  
the cruise control or the ignition are turned off.  
Headlamps  
P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn on  
the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this  
position only works when a vehicle is in the P (Park)  
position.  
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn the  
switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to off/on  
again. This is a momentary control switch that springs  
back when released. The Automatic Headlamp System  
always turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.  
The band on the lever on the outboard side of the  
steering column operates the exterior lamps.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamps on Reminder  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
If the driver’s door is opened and the ignition is turned  
off while leaving the lamps on, a warning chime will  
sound.  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for  
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.  
Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold  
in Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the  
instrument panel that controls the DRL. Do not cover this  
sensor or the head lamps will be on when they are not  
needed.  
Headlamps Off in Park  
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN  
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps  
off when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights  
on, turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp  
position.  
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come  
on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions  
are met:  
The ignition is on.  
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps  
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to  
the AUTO or headlamp position.  
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.  
The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps  
only position (This applies only to vehicles that are  
first sold in Canada).  
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in  
Canada.  
The light sensor detects daytime light.  
Delayed Headlamps  
The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not in  
P (Park).  
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps  
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,  
then the headlamps automatically turn off.  
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker  
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights are  
not on unless you turn the exterior lamps control to the  
parking lamp position.  
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature  
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction  
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.  
The regular headlamp system should be turned on  
when they are needed.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system  
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light switch to  
the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the  
transmission must stay in P (Park) for this function.  
Automatic Headlamp System  
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp  
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness  
along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,  
parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio  
lights will also be dim.  
The regular headlamps should be used when needed.  
Fog Lamps  
The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument  
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system.  
Do not cover the sensor or the automatic headlamp  
system will turn on when it is not needed.  
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button for this feature is  
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the  
steering wheel.  
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime  
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic  
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or  
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.  
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only be  
affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting  
lasting longer than this delay.  
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.  
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on or off. An indicator  
light comes on when the fog lamps are on.  
The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when  
the fog lamps are turned on and off.  
The fog lamps turn off while the high-beam headlamps  
are turned on.  
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic  
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the  
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for  
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is  
light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel  
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the  
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright  
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-16.  
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to  
be on along with the fog lamps.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Brightness  
Entry/Exit Lighting  
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door is  
opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after  
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition is  
turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the unlock  
symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on the  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.  
The knob with this symbol  
is located on the instrument  
panel to the left of the  
steering column.  
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about  
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to  
provide light as you exit.  
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten  
or dim the lights.  
Parade Dimming  
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the  
interior lamps.  
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comes  
on while the parking lamps are turned on during the day.  
It prevents the display lights and indicator lights from  
being dim, while the parking lamps are used during  
the day.  
Dome Lamps  
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.  
They turn off after all the doors are closed.  
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the  
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the  
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,  
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the  
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or  
closed.  
Reading Lamps  
For vehicles with front and rear reading lamps, press  
the lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors are  
closed. These lamps come on automatically when any  
door is opened.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A high electrical load occurs when several of the  
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog  
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at  
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer  
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.  
Electric Power Management  
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that  
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.  
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and  
extended life of the battery.  
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery.  
It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the  
vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle  
speed to generate more power, whenever needed.  
It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some  
accessories.  
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is  
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When  
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly  
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter  
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down.  
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be  
displayed.  
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without  
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of  
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the  
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message  
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,  
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this  
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver  
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.  
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical  
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is  
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning  
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is  
needed for very high electrical loads.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Battery Run-Down Protection  
Accessory Power Outlet(s)  
The vehicle has a battery run-down protection feature  
designed to protect the vehicle’s battery.  
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary  
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.  
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, or visor vanity)  
is left on while the ignition is turned off, the battery  
run-down protection system will automatically shut the  
lamp(s) off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining  
the battery.  
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory  
power outlet is located inside the storage bin below the  
climate controls and the other outlet is on the rear of the  
center storage console.  
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in use,  
always cover the outlet with the protective cap. The  
accessory power outlet is operational at all times.  
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:  
Turn on the ignition.  
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for  
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off  
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied  
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment  
when not in use and do not plug in equipment  
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.  
Turn the exterior lamp control off and then on.  
Open a door.  
Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter  
button (if equipped).  
Press the remote trunk release button.  
Press the power door lock switch.  
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with  
the accessory power outlet and could result in blown  
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,  
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the  
accessory power outlet.  
The battery run-down feature will also be activated  
when any door on the vehicle is left open and the  
ignition is in LOCK/OFF.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your  
vehicle can damage it or keep other components  
from working as they should. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment  
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.  
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding  
electrical equipment.  
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating  
Current  
The vehicle may have a power outlet that can be used  
to plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum  
limit of 150 watts.  
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the  
proper installation instructions included with the  
equipment.  
The power outlet is located  
on the rear of the center  
console.  
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause  
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang  
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the  
plug because the power outlets are designed for  
accessory power plugs only.  
An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in  
use. The light comes on when the ignition is in ON/RUN  
and equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged  
into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.  
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition  
is in LOCK/OFF or if no equipment is plugged into  
the outlet.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you try to connect equipment using more than  
150 watts or a system fault is detected, a protection  
circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light  
turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it  
back in or turn the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off  
and then back on. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
on page 2-23. The power restarts when equipment that  
operates within the limit is plugged into the outlet and a  
system fault is not detected.  
Climate Controls  
Climate Control System  
The heating, cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can  
be controlled with this system.  
The power outlet is not designed for the following  
electrical equipment and may not work properly if these  
items are plugged into the power outlet:  
Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as:  
compressor-driven refrigerators and electric  
power tools.  
Other equipment requiring an extremely stable  
power supply such as: microcomputer-controlled  
electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.  
A. Fan Control  
B. Recirculation  
C. Temperature  
Control  
E. Air Delivery Mode  
Control  
F. Air Conditioning  
G. Rear Window  
Defogger  
D. Outside Air  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation  
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or  
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor  
outlets, with some air directed to the side windows. When  
this mode is selected, the system automatically turns off  
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor  
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.  
The air-conditioning compressor operates although the  
indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning indicator light  
turns off when defog is selected. If the air-conditioning  
button is pressed while in defog mode, the indicator light  
will turn on. If the button is pressed again, the light will  
turn off. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while  
in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the  
windows are clear.  
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the  
temperature inside the vehicle.  
When it is cold outside 0°F (18°C) or lower, use the  
engine coolant heater, if vehicle has one, to provide  
warmer air faster to the vehicle. An engine coolant  
heater warms the coolant the engine uses that provides  
heat to warm the inside of the vehicle. For more  
information, see Engine Coolant Heater on page 2-25.  
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise  
to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan must  
be on to run the air-conditioning compressor.  
1 (Defrost): This mode quickly clears the windshield  
of fog or frost. Air is directed to the windshield with some  
air directed to the floor vents. In this mode, outside air is  
pulled into the vehicle. The air-conditioning compressor  
will not run unless the outside temperature is at or below  
freezing. The air-conditioning compressor operates  
although the indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning  
indicator light turns off when defrost is selected. If the  
air-conditioning button is pressed while in defrost mode,  
the indicator light turns on. If the button is pressed again,  
the light turns off. Recirculation cannot be selected while  
in the defrost mode.  
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or  
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.  
Select from the following:  
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel  
outlets.  
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument  
panel and floor outlets. Some air will be directed toward  
the side windows.  
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some  
air directed to the windshield and side window outlets.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:  
Using these settings together for long periods of time can  
cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.  
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle  
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.  
1. Select 0 .  
2. Select the highest temperature.  
3. Select the highest fan speed.  
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode  
on. An indicator light comes on to show that it is on.  
Air from outside the vehicle will circulate throughout  
the vehicle. The outside air mode can be used with all  
modes, but it cannot be used with the recirculation  
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning  
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show  
it is on.  
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the  
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the  
vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turned off  
is normal.  
mode. Press : to cancel the recirculation mode.  
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation  
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that it is  
on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool  
the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to prevent  
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle. The  
recirculation indicator light blinks three times if you try to  
use recirculation in a mode in which it cannot function.  
Maximum Air Conditioning  
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air  
escape; then close them. This helps reduce the time it  
takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the  
air conditioning system operate more efficiently.  
Pressing this button cancels the outside air mode. When  
switching to the defog or defrost modes the system  
automatically moves from recirculation to outside air.  
When the vehicle or fan is turned off and back on, the  
system defaults to outside air automatically. Only use  
recirculation mode when it is needed for comfort, since  
window fogging can occur.  
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:  
1. Select the C vent mode.  
2. Select the highest fan speed.  
3. Select # air conditioning.  
4. Select the ? recirculation mode.  
5. Select the coolest temperature.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of  
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage  
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a  
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything  
similar to the defogger grid.  
Rear Window Defogger  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  
remove fog or frost from the rear window.  
< REAR: Press to turn the rear window defogger on  
or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the  
rear window defogger is on. Be sure to clear as much  
snow from the rear window as possible.  
Remote Start Climate Control Operation  
For vehicles with the remote start feature, when it is  
activated the climate control system heats or cools the  
inside of the vehicle using the modes that were set before  
the vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will  
remain active during a remote start. However, the climate  
control buttons will be inactive until the ignition is turned  
on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate control system  
will not operate during remote start. See Remote Keyless  
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window  
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is  
pressed. If turned on again, the defogger only runs for  
about seven minutes before turning off. The defogger  
can also be turned off by turning off the engine.  
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph  
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once  
the button is pressed.  
If the vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface of  
the outside mirrors heat when the rear window defogger  
is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-39.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Operation  
Automatic Climate Control System  
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan speed  
control and the air delivery mode control knobs to activate  
the automatic system. When automatic operation is  
active the system controls the inside temperature and  
air delivery.  
For vehicles with this system, the heating, cooling,  
and ventilation can be automatically controlled.  
To place the system in automatic mode do the following:  
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the  
AUTO position.  
The current set temperature displays. When AUTO  
is selected, the air conditioning operation and air  
inlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioning  
compressor runs while the outside temperature is  
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be  
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may  
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help  
quickly cool down the vehicle.  
A. Fan Control  
B. Air Conditioning  
C. Recirculation  
D. Outside Air  
E. Rear Window  
Defogger  
F. Air Delivery Mode  
Control  
G. Display  
H. Temperature  
Control  
2. Set the temperature.  
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.  
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.  
Press w or x to adjust the temperature setting as  
necessary. If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C)  
the system remains at the maximum cooling setting.  
If the temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the system  
remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing  
either maximum setting does not cause the vehicle to  
heat or cool any faster.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not to cover the sensor located on the top of the  
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor  
regulates air temperature based on the intensity  
of the sun.  
Select from the following:  
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel  
outlets.  
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower  
right side of the climate control faceplate, as  
this regulates the inside temperature.  
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument  
panel outlets and the floor outlets.  
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold  
weather, the system delays turning on the fan until  
warm air is available. The length of delay depends on  
the engine coolant temperature. Turning the fan knob  
overrides this delay and changes the fan to the  
selected speed.  
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some  
air directed to the side window outlets.  
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or  
moisture. Air is directed to the floor and windshield  
outlets.  
Manual Operation  
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windows of fog or  
frost more quickly. The system automatically controls  
the fan speed if defrost is selected from the AUTO mode.  
If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, the  
air conditioning compressor automatically runs to help  
dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. The air  
conditioning indicator light blinks three times if the  
compressor is turned off while in this mode.  
9 (Off): Select this position on the fan knob to turn off  
the entire climate control system. Outside air still enters  
the vehicle. The airflow direction and temperature can be  
adjusted.  
x / w Temperature Control: Press the arrows to  
increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.  
# (Air Conditioning): Press turn the air conditioning  
on and off. An indicator light turns on to show the  
air conditioning is on.  
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise  
to increase or decrease the fan speed.  
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or  
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow  
in the vehicle.  
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,  
the system runs the air conditioning automatically to  
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot  
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for the  
vehicle to cool down. Then keep the windows closed for  
the air conditioner to work its best.  
h (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation  
mode on. An indicator light above the button comes on to  
show it is on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly  
cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help  
prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.  
The recirculation indicator light blinks three times if you  
try to use recirculation in a mode in which it cannot  
function.  
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation of  
the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm air to  
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.  
To warm or cool the air delivered, press the temperature  
buttons to the desired setting.  
Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculation  
feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system  
reverts to the auto recirculation function.  
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies the air  
inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the system  
maximizes its performance by using recirculation as  
necessary.  
The recirculation mode cannot be used with the floor,  
defrost, or defog modes. If recirculation is selected in  
these modes, the indicator flashes three times and turns  
off to indicate that this is not allowed. This is to prevent  
window fogging.  
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation  
of the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air  
to the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered,  
press x or w to the desired temperature setting.  
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system  
in recirculation for extended periods of time can cause  
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select  
either defog or defrost. Make sure the air conditioning is  
on. Allow the air conditioning to run automatically to help  
dehumidify the air.  
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO and  
press x or w to adjust the temperature.  
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode  
on. An indicator light comes on to show it is on. Air from  
outside the vehicle will circulate throughout the vehicle.  
The outside air mode can be used with all modes, but it  
cannot be used with the recirculation mode. Pressing  
this button cancels the recirculation mode.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Start Climate Control Operation  
Rear Window Defogger  
For vehicles with remote start, when it is activated the  
climate control system heats and cools the inside of the  
vehicle using the previous system settings before the  
vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will  
remain active during a remote start. However, the climate  
control buttons will be inactive until the ignition is turned  
on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate control system  
will not operate during remote start.  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  
remove fog from the rear window.  
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on  
or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the  
rear window defogger is on.  
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window  
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is  
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press the  
button again.  
With the automatic climate control system, the  
climate control displays “RS” in place of the temperature  
to indicate that remote start is activated. For best  
performance, turn both the fan and mode knobs to AUTO.  
If the temperature is cold enough and the mode knob is  
set to AUTO, the system begins in defrost to clear the  
Operation on page 2-5.  
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph  
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once  
the button is pressed.  
For vehicles with heated outside mirrors, the surface of  
the outside mirrors will also heat when the rear window  
defogger is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors on  
page 2-39.  
Outlet Adjustment  
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to  
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything  
to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These  
actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty.  
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet by  
moving it either up and down or side-to-side, to change  
the direction and amount of airflow in the vehicle.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation Tips  
Warning Lights, Gages, and  
Indicators  
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an  
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the  
warning lights and gages could prevent injury.  
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air  
inlets at the base of the windshield that may  
block the flow of air into the vehicle.  
Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as  
they could adversely affect the performance of  
the system.  
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a  
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some  
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is  
started to indicate they are working.  
Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects  
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more  
effectively.  
When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is  
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the  
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent  
the odor from entering the vehicle through the  
ventilation system. This can be helpful when driving  
through a long tunnel with poor ventilation. However,  
extended usage of this mode in cold or cool weather  
can cause window fogging.  
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and  
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with  
the vehicle.  
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on  
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may  
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.  
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be  
costly and even dangerous.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Cluster  
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,  
how much fuel the vehicle has used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.  
United States Base version shown, Canada Similar  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speedometer and Odometer  
Tachometer  
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both  
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).  
The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolutions  
per minute (rpm).  
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been  
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)  
or kilometers (used in Canada).  
Safety Belt Reminders  
Safety Belt Reminder Light  
This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The  
digital odometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back.  
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for  
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety  
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.  
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must be  
set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that is not  
possible, then it must be set at zero and a label must be  
put on the driver door to show the old mileage reading  
when the new odometer was installed.  
The safety belt light comes  
on and stays on for  
several seconds, then  
flashes for several more.  
Trip Odometer  
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has  
been driven since the odometer was last reset.  
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and  
Displays on page 3-44 for more information.  
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains  
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver  
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the  
light comes on.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime  
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a  
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other  
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or  
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the  
safety belt.  
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light  
Several seconds after the engine is started, a  
chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front  
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs  
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger  
Sensing System on page 1-66 for more information.  
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument  
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and  
then flashes for several more.  
Airbag Readiness Light  
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for  
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates  
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes  
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,  
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.  
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag  
System on page 1-58.  
This chime and light are  
repeated if the passenger  
remains unbuckled and  
the vehicle is in motion.  
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the  
chime nor the light comes on.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The airbag readiness light  
flashes for a few seconds  
when the engine is started.  
If the light does not come  
on then, have it fixed  
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator  
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See  
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66 for important  
safety information. The instrument panel has a  
passenger airbag status indicator.  
immediately.  
{ CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the  
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it  
means the airbag system might not be working  
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not  
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate  
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the  
vehicle serviced right away.  
United States  
Canada  
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status  
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and  
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are  
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if  
equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after  
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either  
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know  
the status of the right front passenger frontal and  
seat-mounted side impact airbags.  
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag  
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come  
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46  
for more information.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front  
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact  
airbag are enabled (may inflate).  
Charging System Light  
This light comes on briefly  
when the ignition key is  
turned to START, but the  
engine is not running, as a  
check to show it is working.  
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger  
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger  
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.  
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights  
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a  
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system.  
See your dealer/retailer for service.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer.  
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays  
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem  
with the charging system. A charging system message  
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for  
more information. This light could indicate that there are  
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an  
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the  
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on,  
turn off accessories, such as the radio and air  
conditioner.  
{ CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and  
stays on, it means that something may be wrong  
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to  
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right  
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31  
for more information, including important safety  
information.  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a  
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
Brake System Warning Light  
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into  
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can  
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking  
both parts need to be working.  
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and  
carefully stop. The brake pedal may be harder to push  
or the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer  
to stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or  
two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for  
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-26.  
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.  
Have the brake system inspected right away.  
{ CAUTION:  
The brake system might not be working properly if  
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with  
the brake system warning light on can lead to a  
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has  
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,  
have the vehicle towed for service.  
United States  
Canada  
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is  
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it  
fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.  
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light  
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light  
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release. If it  
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means  
there is a brake problem.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see  
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for all  
brake related DIC messages.  
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
Warning Light  
For vehicles with the  
Antilock Brake System  
(ABS), this light comes on  
briefly when the engine  
is started.  
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Indicator/Warning Light  
For vehicles with the  
Electronic Stability Control  
(ESC) system or the  
Traction Control System  
(TCS), the indicator/  
warning light comes on  
briefly when the engine is  
started.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light then goes off.  
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light  
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely  
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine  
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or  
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.  
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the  
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the  
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle  
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with  
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on  
page 3-34.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light goes off.  
If this light is on while certain DIC messages display,  
this indicates that the ESC and TCS are not working or  
are disabled.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Warning Light  
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check  
the DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is  
no longer functioning and whether it is because of the  
driver turning off the feature(s), or because the system is  
not working properly and the vehicle requires service.  
This light comes on briefly  
while starting the vehicle.  
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited. If the  
ESC system is disabled, the system does not aid in  
maintaining directional control of the vehicle.  
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS  
or the ESC system is actively working. Check the DIC  
messaging for details to determine which system is  
working. If the LOW TRACTION message appears,  
the system is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE  
message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining  
directional control of the vehicle.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light goes off.  
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature  
warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.  
See Engine Overheating on page 5-34. The vehicle’s  
engine could be damaged, and it might not be  
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 for more  
information.  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with  
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for  
more information on the messages associated with  
this light.  
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on  
when the engine has overheated.  
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon  
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-34  
for more information.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage  
Tire Pressure Light  
For vehicles with a tire  
pressure monitoring  
system, this light comes  
on briefly when the engine  
is started.  
It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System.  
United States  
Canada  
When the Light is On Steady  
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the  
pointer moves towards the H (United States) or to the  
shaded thermostat symbol area (Canada), the engine is  
too hot.  
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly  
underinflated.  
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center  
(DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-46 for more information. Stop and  
check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire is  
underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires on  
page 5-51 for more information.  
A temperature indicator light turns on and a chime  
sounds.  
The vehicle is operated under normal driving conditions  
and the temperature indicator light comes on, pull off the  
road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as  
possible.  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while  
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an  
OBD II problem and service is required.  
When the Light Flashes First and Then is  
On Steady  
This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire  
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a  
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the  
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition  
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-61  
for more information.  
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before  
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light  
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This  
system assists the service technician in correctly  
diagnosing any malfunction.  
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with  
this light on, after a while, the emission controls  
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy  
might not be as good, and the engine might not  
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs  
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
Check Engine Light  
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board  
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation  
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.  
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for  
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner  
environment.  
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,  
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system  
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original  
tires with other than those of the same Tire  
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s  
emission controls and can cause this light to come  
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to  
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.  
This could also result in a failure to pass a required  
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See  
This light should come on  
when the ignition is on, but  
the engine is not running,  
as a check to show it  
is working. If it does not,  
have the vehicle serviced  
by your dealer/retailer.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of  
two ways:  
Light On Steady: An emission control system  
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis  
and service might be required.  
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.  
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could  
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.  
Diagnosis and service might be required.  
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by  
doing the following:  
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling  
the Tank on page 5-10. The diagnostic system can  
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or  
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap  
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.  
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed  
should turn the light off.  
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:  
Reduce vehicle speed.  
Avoid hard accelerations.  
Avoid steep uphill grades.  
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being  
hauled as soon as it is possible.  
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep  
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system  
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected  
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving  
trips should turn the light off.  
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop  
the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn the  
key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine.  
If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and  
see your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor  
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently  
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,  
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,  
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on  
acceleration. These conditions might go away once  
the engine is warmed up.  
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance  
Programs  
Some state/provincial and local governments have or  
might begin programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection  
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.  
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the  
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of  
the proper fuel to turn the light off.  
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass  
an inspection:  
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check  
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the  
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.  
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-6.  
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your  
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer  
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to  
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have  
developed.  
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the  
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines  
that critical emission control systems have not been  
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle  
would be considered not ready for inspection. This  
can happen if the battery has recently been replaced  
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system  
is designed to evaluate critical emission control  
systems during normal driving. This can take several  
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the  
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of  
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can  
prepare the vehicle for inspection.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance  
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the  
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing  
engine oil.  
Oil Pressure Light  
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/  
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator  
light then goes off.  
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not  
flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be  
low on oil and it might have some other system problem.  
{ CAUTION:  
Security Light  
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.  
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.  
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon  
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.  
For information regarding  
this light and the vehicle’s  
security system, see  
page 2-18.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cruise Control Light  
Fuel Gage  
The cruise control light  
comes on whenever the  
cruise control is set.  
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.  
See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.  
United States  
Canada  
Highbeam On Light  
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows much fuel is  
left in the fuel tank. When the indicator nears empty, a  
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays.  
The vehicle still has a little fuel left, but the vehicle should  
be fueled soon. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the  
side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.  
This light comes on when  
the high-beam headlamps  
are in use.  
for more information.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are four things that some owners ask about.  
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with  
the fuel gage:  
The DIC buttons are  
located on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off  
before the gage reads full.  
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the  
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have  
indicated the fuel tank was half full, but it actually  
took a little more or less than half the fuel tank’s  
capacity to fill it.  
The indicator moves a little while turning a corner or  
speeding up.  
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through  
the vehicle information mode displays.  
The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is  
turned off.  
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle  
information mode displays, select a personalization  
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning  
message.  
Driver Information Center (DIC)  
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).  
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your  
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver  
personalization menu modes and warning/status  
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,  
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.  
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the  
same time for one second, then release the buttons  
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle  
Personalization on page 3-50 for more information.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trip Odometer  
DIC Operation and Displays  
Press the information button until the outside air  
temperature along with A or B displays. These modes  
show the current distance traveled since the last  
reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or  
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at  
the same time.  
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has  
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the  
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the  
following.  
Information Modes  
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the  
reset button for a few seconds while the desired  
trip odometer is displayed.  
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through  
the following vehicle information modes:  
Outside Air Temperature  
FUEL RANGE  
The outside air temperature will be displayed at the  
same time as the Odometer and the Trip Odometer. The  
temperature outside of the vehicle will be displayed in  
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).  
The outside air temperature appears on the left side of  
the DIC display and the odometer, or trip odometer,  
appears on the right side of the display.  
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE displays.  
This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive  
without refueling in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).  
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in  
the tank.  
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.  
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range  
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your  
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.  
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.  
Odometer  
Press the information button until the outside air  
temperature and the odometer displays. This mode  
shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven  
in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).  
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,  
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on  
page 3-50.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)  
OIL LIFE  
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG  
displays. This mode shows how many miles per  
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)  
your vehicle is getting based on current and past  
driving conditions.  
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.  
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s  
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system  
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil  
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.  
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the  
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.  
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from  
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is  
continually updated each time you drive.  
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the  
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in  
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine  
Oil on page 5-21 and Scheduled Maintenance on  
page 6-4.  
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil  
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”  
under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-24.  
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)  
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST  
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at  
a particular moment and changes frequently as driving  
conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous  
fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per  
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average fuel economy,  
this screen cannot be reset.  
Tire Pressure  
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System  
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in  
the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds  
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the  
information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays  
for the front tires. Press the information button again until  
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.  
AV (Average) SPEED  
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.  
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in  
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).  
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system  
while driving, a message advising you to check the tire  
pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire  
on page 3-46 for more information.  
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the  
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BRAKE FLUID  
DIC Warnings and Messages  
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when the  
brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning light on  
the instrument panel cluster also comes on. See Brake  
System Warning Light on page 3-34 for more information.  
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as  
soon as possible.  
These messages appear if there is a problem detected  
in one of your vehicle’s systems.  
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no  
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it  
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.  
If the condition is still present, the warning message  
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off and  
back on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds  
when the message displays. Your vehicle may have other  
warning messages.  
CHANGE OIL SOON  
This message displays when the life of the engine oil  
has expired and it should be changed.  
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from  
the display, the engine oil life system must still be  
reset separately. See Engine Oil Life System on  
page 5-24, Engine Oil on page 5-21, and Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.  
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF  
This message displays if the automatic headlamp system  
is disabled with the headlamp switch. See Automatic  
Headlamp System on page 3-15 for more information.  
CHECK GAS CAP  
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON  
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully  
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it  
is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly  
installed should turn the message off.  
This message displays if the automatic headlamp  
system is enabled with the headlamp switch. See  
Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15 for more  
information.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)  
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED  
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System  
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one  
or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire  
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as  
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to  
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See  
Tires on page 5-51, Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20,  
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59. The DIC also  
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and  
Displays on page 3-44. If the tire pressure is low, the low  
tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure  
Light on page 3-37.  
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine  
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the  
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but  
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your  
destination. The performance may be reduced the next  
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a  
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration  
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays  
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for  
service as soon as possible.  
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),  
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the  
instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting  
you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel or  
hear the system working and see this message displayed  
in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist when this  
message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.  
This message may stay on for a few seconds after ESC  
stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.  
This is normal when the system is operating. See  
for more information.  
CRUISE ENGAGED  
This message displays when the cruise control system  
is active. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more  
information.  
DOOR AJAR  
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s  
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the  
door(s) are closed completely.  
ENGINE DISABLED  
This message displays if the starting of the engine  
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer immediately.  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF  
LOW TRACTION  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),  
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the  
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is  
turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic  
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more  
information.  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),  
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the  
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is  
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may  
exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving  
accordingly. This message stays on for a few seconds  
after the system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction  
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more  
information.  
ICE POSSIBLE  
This message displays when the outside air temperature  
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
LOW WASHER FLUID  
This message displays when the vehicle’s windshield  
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid  
reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.  
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38.  
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW  
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry  
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery  
in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under  
page 2-5.  
POWER STEERING  
On some vehicles, this message displays if a problem  
has been detected with the electric power steering. Have  
your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.  
LOW FUEL  
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.  
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage  
on page 3-42, Fuel on page 5-5, and Filling the Tank on  
page 5-10 for more information.  
PUSH PARK PEDAL  
This message displays if the parking brake is left  
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more  
information.  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE AIR BAG  
SERVICE TRACTION  
This message displays when there is a problem with the  
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer immediately.  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),  
this message displays and a chime sounds when the  
system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS light  
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light  
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains  
present. When this message displays, the system is not  
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction  
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more  
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY  
CONTROL)  
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this  
message displays and a chime sounds if there has been  
a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light also  
appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light stays  
on solid as long as the detected problem remains  
present. When this message displays, the system is not  
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic  
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more  
information.  
information. Have the system serviced by your dealer/  
retailer as soon as possible.  
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR  
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System  
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is  
not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes  
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See  
Tire Pressure Light on page 3-37. Several conditions may  
cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor  
Operation on page 5-62 for more information. If the  
warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem  
with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.  
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off the  
road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting  
the system by turning the ignition off and then back on.  
If this message still stays on or turns back on again while  
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the  
ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as  
possible.  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:  
TRACTION OFF  
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),  
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the  
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the system  
is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction  
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more  
information.  
Entering Personalization Menu  
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.  
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is  
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.  
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at  
the same time for one second, then release to enter  
the personalization menu.  
TRUNK AJAR  
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),  
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.  
This message displays when the trunk is not closed  
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed  
completely. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more  
information.  
3. Press the information button to scroll through the  
available personalization menu modes.  
Press the reset button to scroll through the available  
settings for each mode.  
DIC Vehicle Personalization  
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,  
the display will go back to the previous information  
displayed.  
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow  
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.  
All of the features listed may not be available on your  
vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on  
the DIC.  
The default settings for the features were set when your  
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from  
their default state since that time.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REMOTE START  
Personalization Menu Modes  
OIL LIFE RESET  
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows  
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows  
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using  
your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. When  
REMOTE START appears on the display, press and hold  
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through  
the available settings:  
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine  
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life  
System on page 5-24. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC  
Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more  
information.  
UNITS  
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.  
This feature allows you to select the units of  
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle  
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press  
and hold the reset button for at least one second to  
scroll through the available settings:  
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.  
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for more  
information.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information  
will be displayed in English units.  
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be  
displayed in metric units.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOCK HORN  
UNLOCK HORN  
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp  
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry  
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.  
When LOCK HORN appears on the display, press and  
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll  
through the available settings:  
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on  
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.  
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press  
and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll  
through the available settings:  
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press  
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn will  
still chirp on the second press.  
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock  
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.  
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock  
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock  
button on the RKE transmitter.  
button on the RKE transmitter.  
page 2-5 for more information.  
page 2-5 for more information.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIGHT FLASH  
DELAY LOCK  
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior hazard/  
turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock, or  
trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or disabled.  
When LIGHT FLASH appears on the display, press and  
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll  
through the available settings:  
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the  
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY  
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset  
button for at least one second to scroll through the  
available settings:  
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds  
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily override  
delayed locking by pressing the power lock switch or  
the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter a second time.  
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not  
flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on  
the RKE transmitter are pressed.  
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting  
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons  
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.  
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing  
the power lock switch or the lock button on the  
RKE transmitter.  
page 2-5 for more information.  
Operation on page 2-5 for more information.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)  
UNLK (Unlock)  
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically  
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When  
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold  
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through  
the available settings:  
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected  
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines  
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When  
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset  
button for at least one second to scroll through the  
available settings:  
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.  
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.  
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is  
turned off.  
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.  
You will need to manually unlock the doors.  
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock  
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).  
for more information.  
for more information.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS  
LANGUAGE  
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter  
lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can  
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on  
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least  
one second to scroll through the available settings:  
This feature allows you to select the language in which  
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on  
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least  
one second to scroll through the available settings:  
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in  
English.  
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on when  
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.  
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.  
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.  
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.  
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on  
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is  
pressed.  
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization  
menu mode, press the information button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
page 2-5 for more information.  
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,  
press the information button while the desired setting is  
displayed on the DIC.  
Exiting Personalization Menu  
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the  
following conditions occur:  
A ten second time period has elapsed.  
The ignition is turned off.  
The end of the personalization menu list is reached.  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding  
any equipment.  
Audio System(s)  
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the  
following pages to become familiar with its features.  
Adding audio or communication equipment could  
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,  
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.  
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and  
telephone equipment.  
{ CAUTION:  
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,  
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle  
operate through the radio/entertainment system.  
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment  
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not  
work. Make sure that replacement or additional  
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before  
on page 5-3.  
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods  
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to  
you or others. Do not give extended attention to  
entertainment tasks while driving.  
This system provides access to many audio and non  
audio listings.  
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,  
do the following while the vehicle is parked:  
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With  
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the  
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power  
(RAP) on page 2-23 for more information.  
Become familiar with the operation and controls of  
the audio system.  
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset  
radio stations.  
For more information, see Defensive Driving on  
page 4-2.  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
With Date Display  
Setting the Clock  
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and  
Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player  
Without Date Display  
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD  
Player  
To set the time and date:  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or  
To set the time:  
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or  
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,  
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.  
minute, month, day, and year) displays.  
2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on the  
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs  
that you want to change.  
display. Press H a second time and the minute  
begins flashing on the display.  
4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:  
Press the softkey located below the selected tab.  
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are  
flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.  
Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.  
Turn f clockwise.  
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing  
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the  
flashing stops after five seconds and the current  
time displayed is automatically set.  
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the  
following:  
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
Press ©SEEK or s REV.  
Turn f counterclockwise.  
24 hour, press H and then the pushbutton located below  
the forward arrow tab. Once the time 12H and 24H are  
displayed, press the pushbutton located below the  
The date does not automatically display. To see the date  
press H while the radio is on. The date with display times  
out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal  
radio and time display.  
desired option to select the default. Press H again to  
apply the selected default, or let the screen time out.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or to change the date default setting from  
month/day/year to day/month/year:  
6. To decrease the time or date do one of the  
following:  
Press ©SEEK or s REV.  
Turn f counterclockwise.  
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the  
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,  
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)  
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.  
The date does not automatically display. To see the date  
press MENU and then softkey below the H tab while  
the radio is on. The date with display times out after a  
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio and time  
display.  
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.  
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or  
let the screen time out.  
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or to change the date default setting from  
month/day/year to day/month/year:  
Six-Disc CD (MP3) Player  
To set the time and date:  
1. Press MENU, and then the softkey below the  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or  
H tab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.  
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.  
2. Press the softkey below the forward arrow tab.  
The time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY  
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,  
month, and year) displays.  
2. Press MENU.  
3. Press the softkey below the H tab. The HR, MIN,  
MM, DD, YYYY displays.  
3. Press the softkey located below the desired option.  
4. Press the softkey below any one of the tabs you  
want to change.  
4. Press MENU again to apply the selected default,  
or let the screen time out.  
5. To increase the time or date do one of the following:  
Press the softkey located below the selected tab.  
Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.  
Turn f clockwise.  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio(s)  
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio  
with CD (MP3) similar, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)  
similar  
Radio with CD (Base)  
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio  
system.  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed  
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,  
or High) to select the level of radio volume  
compensation. The display times out after  
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting  
allows for more radio volume compensation at  
faster vehicle speeds.  
Radio Data System (RDS)  
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available  
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS  
information. This system relies upon receiving specific  
information from these stations and only works when the  
information is available. While the radio is tuned to an  
FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.  
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect  
information that causes the radio features to work  
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.  
Finding a Station  
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM, or  
XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base). Press  
to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on the  
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, Radio with  
CD (MP3), or Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3).  
Playing the Radio  
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and  
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.  
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.  
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios  
with the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature  
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for  
road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows  
down, so that the volume level is consistent.  
© SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong  
signal in the selected band.  
To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to go  
to the previous station and stay there.  
To activate SCV:  
To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for a  
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio  
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then  
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.  
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.  
goes to the next station. Press ©SEEK again to  
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on  
the radio display.  
stop scanning.  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To scan preset stations in the selected band, press  
To scan preset stations in the selected band, press  
and hold ©SEEK for four seconds until a double  
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,  
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored  
and hold ¨SEEK for four seconds until a double  
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,  
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored  
preset. Press ©SEEK again to stop scanning preset  
preset. Press ¨SEEK again to stop scanning preset  
stations.  
stations.  
¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong  
4 (Information): For vehicles with the Radio with CD  
(Base), press to switch the display between the radio  
station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off,  
signal in the selected band.  
To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to go  
press 4 to display the time.  
to the next station and stay there.  
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,  
To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for a  
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio  
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then  
press 4 to display additional text information related to the  
current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA song.  
Song title information will be displayed on the top line of  
the display while the artist information will be displayed  
on the bottom line, it the information is available during  
XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback. When information is not  
available, “No Info” displays.  
goes to the next station. Press ¨SEEK again to  
stop scanning.  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To store a station as a favorite:  
Storing Radio Stations  
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the  
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.  
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio  
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.  
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the  
station.  
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite  
Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as  
favorites.  
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep  
sounds.  
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites  
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations  
using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel  
controls. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored  
as a favorite.  
To setup the number of favorites pages:  
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.  
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.  
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be  
stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below  
the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio  
favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV to go  
through up to six pages of favorites, each having six  
favorite stations available per page. Each page of  
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM  
stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings are  
also stored with the favorite stations.  
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages  
by pressing the softkey located below the displayed  
page numbers.  
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to  
the original main radio screen showing the radio  
station frequency tabs and to begin programming  
favorites.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and  
WMA features): If additional information is available  
for the current song being played, Auto Text will  
automatically page/scroll the information every  
three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio  
display. By default, Auto Text is enabled.  
Storing a Radio Station as a Preset  
Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio  
stations as presets.  
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations  
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed  
on the six numbered buttons.  
To change the Auto Text setting:  
To store preset stations:  
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.  
1. Tune in the desired station.  
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radio  
display.  
2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for  
three seconds until a beep sounds.  
3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the  
radio display.  
3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered  
button.  
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information  
is longer than what can be displayed, the extra  
information will page every three seconds when  
Auto Text is activated.  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange, or  
treble:  
Setting the Tone  
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)  
Press ©SEEK, or s REV.  
Turn f counterclockwise.  
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The  
radio may display some or all tones such as BASS, MID,  
and TREB.  
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,  
or treble to the middle position by pressing the  
softkey below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more  
than two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level  
adjusts to the middle position.  
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (Base):  
Press f until the tone control labels display, then turn f  
to change the setting.  
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and  
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for  
more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.  
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3)  
and USB Port, Radio with CD (MP3), or Radio with  
Six-Disc CD (MP3):  
If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decrease  
the treble.  
1. Press f until the tone control tabs display.  
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be  
adjusted.  
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset  
equalization settings.  
3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange, or  
treble:  
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual  
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,  
or treble by pressing f .  
Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.  
Turn f clockwise.  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to  
the middle position by pressing the softkey below the BAL  
or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps  
once and the level adjusts to the middle position.  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the  
Balance/Fade can be adjusted using f or ` .  
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and  
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for  
more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.  
To adjust balance or fade using f :  
1. Press f until the speaker control tabs display.  
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continue  
Finding a Category (CAT) Station  
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)  
pressing f to highlight the desired tab.  
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting. The  
highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing  
either SEEK arrow.  
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button  
feature.  
To select and find a desired category:  
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also  
be used to adjust the highlighted level.  
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.  
To adjust balance or fade using ` :  
2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the radio  
display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the  
desired category name displays.  
1. Press ` until the speaker control labels display.  
2. Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker  
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired  
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM  
station associated with that category.  
control label displays.  
3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can  
also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,  
\ FWD, or s REV.  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station within  
the selected category, do one of the following:  
Radio Messages  
Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer  
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be  
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.  
Turn f .  
Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows  
on the radio display.  
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®  
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your dealer/  
retailer for service.  
Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.  
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV  
button or BAND button to display the favorites again.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be  
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.  
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the  
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:  
XM Satellite Radio Service  
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.  
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.  
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the  
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.  
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming  
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in  
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you  
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio  
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service fee  
is required to receive the XM service. For more  
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call  
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call  
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.  
3. Turn f to display the category to be removed.  
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the  
category name along with the word Removed  
displays.  
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.  
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the  
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category  
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore  
All tab.  
Radio Messages for XM Only  
Categories cannot be removed or added while the  
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).  
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-77 for more  
information.  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading a CD  
Radio’s with a Single CD Player  
Ejecting a CD  
Radio’s with a Single CD Player  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.  
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.  
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not  
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically  
pulls back into the player.  
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As  
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.  
Radio’s with a Six-Disc CD Player  
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single  
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller  
CDs are loaded in the same manner.  
Z EJECT: Press to eject a CD. If the CD is not  
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically  
pulls back into the player.  
Radio’s with a Six-Disc CD Player  
To eject the CD that is currently playing:  
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.  
This CD player holds up to six CDs.  
1. Press and release Z . The radio beeps once and  
Ejecting Disc displays  
To insert one CD:  
2. Once the disc is ejected and Remove Disc displays,  
remove the CD from the player.  
1. Press and release ^ .  
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.  
To eject all CDs:  
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,  
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.  
1. Press and hold Z for two seconds. A beep  
sounds and Ejecting All Discs displays.  
To insert multiple CDs:  
2. Once the disc is ejected and Remove Disc displays,  
remove the CD from the player.  
1. Press and hold ^ for two seconds. A beep sounds  
and Load All Discs displays.  
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert  
the discs.  
3. Press ^ again to cancel loading more CDs.  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,  
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs  
in a Six-Disc CD player.  
Playing a CD  
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the  
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio  
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it  
was the last selected audio source.  
To use random on the base radio with Single CD player:  
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random  
Current Disc displays.  
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently  
playing.  
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.  
To use random on a radio with a Six-Disc CD player:  
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track, if  
more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or  
press multiple times to continue moving backward  
through the tracks on the CD.  
1. To play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order,  
press the softkey below the RDM tab until  
Randomize All Discs displays.  
2. To play tracks from the CD currently playing in  
random order, press the softkey below the RDM  
tab until Random Current Disc displays.  
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold  
or press multiple times to continue moving forward  
through the tracks on the CD.  
3. To turn off random, press the same softkey again.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback  
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced  
volume and the elapsed time of the track displays.  
Release to resume playing the track.  
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is  
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future  
listening.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while  
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message  
showing the track number displays when a CD is  
in the player. Press this button again and the system  
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such  
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is  
not connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance  
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a  
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track  
displays. Release to resume playing the track.  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc  
Care of CDs  
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective  
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The  
CD player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom  
of a CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all.  
Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it.  
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge  
of the hole and the outer edge.  
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth or  
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent  
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the  
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.  
The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or  
CD-RW disc. See Using an MP3 on page 3-71 for  
more information.  
CD Messages  
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the  
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following  
reasons:  
The CD player is very hot. When the temperature  
returns to normal, the CD should play.  
Care of the CD Player  
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD  
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the  
CD if a description is needed.  
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the  
CD player.  
The road is very rough. When the road becomes  
smoother, the CD should play.  
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and  
try again.  
A problem may have occurred while burning the CD.  
The label could be caught in the CD player.  
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than  
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an  
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,  
the CD player could be damaged. While using the  
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without  
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the  
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign  
materials, liquids, and debris.  
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,  
try a known good CD.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot  
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio  
displays an error message, write it down and provide  
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.  
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this  
section.  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a  
portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.  
Press again and the system begins playing audio from  
the connected portable audio player. If a portable audio  
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device may  
display.  
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack  
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack  
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not  
an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the  
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such  
as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,  
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use  
as another audio source.  
Using the USB Port  
Radio’s with a USB port can control a USB storage  
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.  
See Using an MP3 on page 3-71 for information about  
how to connect and control a USB storage device or  
an iPod.  
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device  
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on  
page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.  
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm  
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.  
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX  
button to begin playing audio from the device over the  
vehicle speakers.  
USB Support  
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio  
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.  
USB Supported Devices  
USB Flash Drives  
O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.  
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made  
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or  
not loud.  
Portable USB Hard Drives  
Fifth generation or later iPod  
First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano  
iPod touch  
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio  
device is connected to the auxiliary input. The portable  
audio device continues playing until it is stopped or  
turned off.  
iPod classic  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple®  
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using  
the latest iTunes® application. See apple.com/itunes.  
CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and Folder  
Structure  
The radio supports:  
For help with identifying your iPod, go to  
apple.com/support.  
Up to 50 folders.  
Up to 8 folders in depth.  
Up to 50 playlists.  
Using an MP3  
Format  
Up to 255 files.  
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.  
Files with an .mp3 or .cda file extension.  
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3’s can  
play .mp3 files that were recorded onto a CD-R or  
CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can play .mp3  
and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage device  
as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod®.  
USB Supported File and Folder Structure  
The radio supports:  
Compressed Audio  
Up to 700 folders.  
The radio can play discs that contain both  
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files.  
Up to 8 folders in depth.  
Up to 65,535 files.  
Radios with a single CD player read all MP3 files first,  
then the uncompressed CD audio files.  
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.  
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.  
AAC files stored on an iPod.  
FAT16  
Radios with a six-CD player only read MP3 files unless  
the CAT button is pressed to toggle to uncompressed  
audio files.  
FAT32  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When play enters a new folder, the display does not  
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder  
mode has been chosen as the default display. The new  
track name displays.  
Root Directory  
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored  
in the root directory when the disc or storage device  
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root  
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.  
File System and Naming  
The song name that displays is the song name that is  
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present  
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name  
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.  
Empty Folder  
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the  
player advances to the next folder that contains files.  
Order of Play  
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are  
shortened. The display does not show parts of words on  
the last page of text and the extension of the filename is  
not displayed.  
Tracks are played in the following order:  
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist  
and continues sequentially through all tracks in  
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist  
has played, play continues from the first track of  
the first playlist.  
Preprogrammed Playlists  
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were  
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real  
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there  
is no playlist editing capability using the radio. These  
playlists are treated as special folders containing  
compressed audio song files.  
Play begins from the first track in the first folder and  
continues sequentially through all tracks in each  
folder. When the last track of the last folder has  
played, play continues from the first track of the  
first folder.  
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are  
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio  
with a USB port.  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3  
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to  
go to the first track in the next folder.  
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently  
playing.  
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD  
in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD  
or all discs in the Six-Disc CD player. To use random:  
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more  
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or  
press multiple times to continue moving backward  
through tracks.  
1. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random  
Current Disc displays to play songs from the current  
CD in random order. Press the same softkey  
again to turn off random play.  
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold  
or press multiple times to continue moving forward  
through tracks.  
2. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until  
Randomize All Discs displays to play songs from  
all CDs loaded in the Six-Disc CD player in random  
order. Press the same softkey again to turn off  
random play.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback  
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the  
elapsed time of the file displays. Release s REV to  
resume playing.  
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h  
to have the files played in order by artist or album.  
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and  
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes  
to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the  
disc. The radio may begin playing while it is scanning  
in the background.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance  
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced  
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.  
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed  
time of the file displays.  
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files  
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on  
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that  
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in  
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.  
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey below  
S c to go to the first track in the previous folder.  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey  
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next  
or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing  
either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist  
displays.  
Connecting a USB Storage Device  
or iPod®  
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB  
storage device.  
To change from playback by artist to playback by album:  
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.  
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device  
to the USB port located on the front of the radio.  
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable  
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector and  
connect the other end to the USB port located on the front  
of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB connection  
works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo may appear on  
the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’s display. The  
iPod music appears on the radio’s display and begins  
playing.  
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from  
the sort screen.  
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to  
the main music navigator screen.  
The album name displays on the second line between the  
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.  
Once all songs from that album have played, the player  
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD  
and begins playing MP3 files from that album.  
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle  
if the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN  
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod  
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw  
power from the vehicle’s battery.  
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below  
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.  
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it  
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input  
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) stereo cable.  
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more  
information.  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Radio to Control a USB  
Storage Device or iPod  
Using Softkeys to Control a USB  
Storage Device or iPod  
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod  
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song  
information on the radio’s display.  
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to  
control the functions listed below.  
To use the softkeys:  
f (Tune): Turn to select files.  
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display  
to display the functions listed below, or press the  
softkey below the function if it is currently displayed.  
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more  
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press  
multiple times to continue moving backward through  
tracks.  
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on  
it to use that function.  
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the  
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.  
Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.  
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and  
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward  
through tracks.  
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back to  
the main display screen on an iPod, or the root directory  
on a USB storage device.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback  
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release  
s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file  
displays.  
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view  
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.  
To browse and select files:  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance  
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.  
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time of  
the file displays.  
1. Press the softkey below c .  
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.  
4 (Information): Press to display additional information  
about the selected track.  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Genres  
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is  
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until  
the desired folder is reached.  
Songs  
Composers  
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected  
To select files:  
folder.  
1. Press the softkey below h .  
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.  
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.  
3. Press f to select the desired menu.  
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used  
to navigate in the following order:  
First softkey, first item in the list.  
4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the  
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the  
softkey is pressed.  
selected menu.  
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.  
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the  
softkey is pressed.  
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used  
to navigate in the following order:  
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the  
softkey is pressed.  
First softkey, first item in the list.  
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the  
softkey is pressed.  
Fifth softkey, end of the list.  
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h  
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod’s  
menu system. Files are sorted by:  
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the  
softkey is pressed.  
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the  
softkey is pressed.  
Playlists  
Artists  
Fifth softkey, end of the list.  
Albums  
3-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeat Functionality  
< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to  
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.  
To use Repeat:  
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to  
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage  
device.  
Press the softkey below " or ' to select between  
Repeat All and Repeat Track.  
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat  
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All  
is being used. This is the default mode when a  
USB storage device or iPod is first connected.  
XM Radio Messages  
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or  
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,  
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).  
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to  
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat  
Track is being used.  
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is  
being updated, and no action is required. This process  
should take no longer than 30 seconds.  
Shuffle Functionality  
To use Shuffle:  
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but  
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™  
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,  
the signal should return.  
Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to select  
between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs,  
Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.  
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and  
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.  
This message should disappear shortly.  
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn  
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storage  
device or iPod is first connected.  
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in  
service. Tune in to another channel.  
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the  
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the USB  
storage device or iPod.  
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be  
received with your XM Subscription package.  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel  
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this  
station was one of the presets, choose another station  
for that preset button.  
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message  
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.  
This label is needed to activate the service.  
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to  
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult  
with your dealer/retailer.  
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this  
time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
No Title Info: No song title information is available  
at this time on this channel. The system is working  
properly.  
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear  
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a  
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.  
No CAT Info: No category information is available at  
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear within  
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.  
Consult with your dealer/retailer.  
No Information: No text or informational messages are  
available at this time on this channel. The system is  
working properly.  
Bluetooth®  
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth  
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and  
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the  
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The  
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).  
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones  
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth  
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information on  
compatible phones.  
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for  
the selected category. The system is working properly.  
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle  
could have previously been in another vehicle. For  
security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped  
between vehicles. If this message is received after  
having the vehicle serviced, check with your  
dealer/retailer.  
3-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Voice Recognition  
Bluetooth Controls  
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret  
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.  
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate  
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio Steering  
Wheel Controls on page 3-89 for more information.  
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The  
system may not recognize voice commands if there is  
too much background noise.  
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,  
to confirm system information, and to start speech  
recognition.  
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system  
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice  
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.  
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a  
call, or to cancel an operation.  
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural  
voice.  
Pairing  
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to  
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected  
to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions  
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not  
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free  
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for  
more information.  
Audio System  
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound  
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers  
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system  
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.  
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later  
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is  
used if the volume is turned down too low.  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pairing Information:  
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will  
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide for information on this  
process.  
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system.  
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is  
moving.  
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list  
on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on  
the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that  
was provided in Step 3.  
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links  
with the first available paired cell phone in the  
order the phone was paired.  
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use  
a name that best describes the phone. This name  
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.  
The system then confirms the name provided.  
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the  
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.  
Pairing should only need to be completed once,  
unless changes to the pairing information have  
been made or the phone is deleted.  
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has  
been successfully paired” after the pairing process  
is complete.  
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a  
Different Phone later in this section.  
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to  
be paired.  
Pairing a Phone  
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions  
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will  
be used in Step 4.  
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth  
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the  
system will say “Is connected” after the connected  
phone.  
3-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with  
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.  
Deleting a Paired Phone  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
If another phone is found, the response will be  
“<Phone name> is now connected”.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
If another phone is not found, the original phone  
remains connected.  
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to  
delete followed by a tone.  
Storing Name Tags  
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the  
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command for  
a list of all paired phones. The system responds with  
“Would you like to delete <phone name>? Yes or No”  
followed by a tone.  
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as  
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and  
OnStar systems.  
The system uses the following commands to store and  
retrieve phone numbers:  
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system  
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.  
Store  
Digit Store  
Directory  
Linking to a Different Phone  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Using the Store Command  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
The store command allows a phone number to be  
stored without entering the digits individually.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,  
number please” followed by a tone.  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at  
once with no pauses.  
Using the Digit Store Command  
The digit store command allows a phone number to be  
stored by entering the digits individually.  
If the system recognizes the number it responds  
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone  
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the  
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the  
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not  
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the  
number to be re-entered.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with  
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by  
a tone.  
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will  
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.  
Continue entering digits until the number to be  
stored is complete.  
4. After the system stores the phone number, it  
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed  
by a tone.  
If an unwanted number is recognized by the  
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the  
last number.  
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name  
tag is recorded and the system responds with  
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.  
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the  
system, say “Verify” at any time and the  
system will repeat them.  
If the name tag does not sound correct, say  
“No” and repeat Step 5.  
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and  
the name tag is stored. After the number is  
stored the system returns to the main menu.  
4. After the complete number has been entered, say  
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the  
name tag” followed by a tone.  
3-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name  
tag is recorded and the system responds with  
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.  
Using the Delete Command  
The delete command allows specific name tags to be  
deleted.  
If the name tag does not sound correct, say  
“No” and repeat Step 5.  
To use the delete command:  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and  
the name tag is stored. After the number is  
stored the system returns to the main menu.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,  
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.  
Using the Directory Command  
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system  
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name  
tag>? Please say yes or no”.  
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored  
by the system. To use the directory command:  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete  
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,  
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with  
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored  
name tags. When the list is complete, the system  
returns to the main menu.  
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system  
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say  
the name tag.”  
Deleting Name Tags  
The system uses the following commands to delete  
name tags:  
Delete  
Delete all name tags  
3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command  
Using the Dial Command  
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored  
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,  
if present.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using  
<phone name>. Number please” followed by a tone.  
To use the delete all name tags command:  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
3. Say the entire number without pausing.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
If the system recognizes the number, it responds  
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.  
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds  
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored  
in your phone directory and your route destination  
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please  
say yes or no.”  
If the system does not recognize the number,  
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.  
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system  
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.  
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system  
will ask for the number to be re-entered.  
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.  
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the  
main menu.  
Using the Digit Dial Command  
Making a Call  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Calls can be made using the following commands:  
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit  
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit  
to dial” followed by a tone.  
Dial  
Digit Dial  
Call  
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following  
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it  
heard followed by a tone.  
Re-dial  
3-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be  
dialed is complete. After the whole number has  
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with  
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.  
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right  
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by a  
tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The  
system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”  
and dials the number. If the name tag is not  
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the  
name tag to be re-entered.  
If an unwanted number is recognized by the  
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the  
last number.  
Once connected, the person called will be heard  
through the audio speakers.  
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the  
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system  
will repeat them.  
Using the Re-dial Command  
Using the Call Command  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds  
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the  
last number called from the connected Bluetooth  
phone.  
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using  
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed  
by a tone.  
Once connected, the person called will be heard  
through the audio speakers.  
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.  
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it  
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and  
dials the number.  
Receiving a Call  
When an incoming call is received, the audio system  
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.  
Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.  
Press c x to ignore a call.  
3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Waiting  
Ending a Call  
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone  
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.  
Press c x to end a call.  
Muting a Call  
Press b g to answer an incoming call when another  
call is active. The original call is placed on hold.  
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be  
muted so that the person on the other end of the call  
cannot hear them.  
Press b g again to return to the original call.  
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the original  
call with no action.  
To Mute a call  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
Press c x to disconnect the current call and  
followed by a tone.  
switch to the call on hold.  
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call  
muted”.  
Three-Way Calling  
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth  
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier  
to work.  
To Cancel Mute  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds  
with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system  
responds with “Resuming call”.  
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with  
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.  
Transferring a Call  
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of  
the third party to be called.  
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.  
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all  
the callers together.  
3-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone  
Voice Pass-Thru  
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:  
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition  
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone  
supports this feature. This feature can be used to  
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with  
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from  
the vehicle to the cell phone.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle  
Bluetooth System  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with  
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.  
The connection process can take up to two minutes after  
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY  
position.  
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with  
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.  
The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will  
go through its cycle according to the phone’s  
operating instructions.  
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,  
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio  
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.  
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)  
Tones  
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and  
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used  
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account  
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for  
retrieval during menu driven calls.  
3-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Say the name tag to send.  
Sending a Number During a Call  
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it  
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and  
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a  
number to send tones” followed by a tone.  
If the system is not sure it recognized the name  
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,  
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the  
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system  
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and  
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
3. Say the number to send.  
If the system clearly recognizes the number it  
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the  
dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
If the system is not sure it recognized the number  
properly, it responds “Dial Number, Please say  
yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the number is  
correct, say “Yes”. The system responds with  
“OK, Sending Number” and the dial tones are sent  
and the call continues.  
Clearing the System  
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This  
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and  
phone pairing information. For information on how to  
delete this information, see the above sections on  
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.  
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
Other Information  
followed by a tone.  
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the  
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by  
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and  
trade names are those of their respective owners.  
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with  
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.  
3-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
Vehicles with audio  
steering wheel controls  
could differ depending  
on the vehicle’s options.  
Some audio controls can  
be adjusted at the steering  
wheel.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
e + / e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease  
the radio volume.  
w / x (Next / Previous): Press to change radio  
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and  
navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.  
Theft-Deterrent Feature  
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the  
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate  
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.  
To change radio stations:  
Press and release w or x to go to the next or  
previous radio station stored as a preset.  
Press and hold w or x to go to the next or  
previous radio station in the selected band with a  
strong signal.  
3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To select tracks on a CD:  
3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down  
the list.  
Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous  
track.  
To select a folder, press and hold w when the  
folder is highlighted.  
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:  
To go back further in the folder list, press and  
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song  
until the contents of the current folder display on  
the radio display.  
hold x .  
c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a  
current call.  
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down  
the list, then press and hold w to play the  
b g (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence the  
highlighted track.  
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.  
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:  
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press  
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song  
until the contents of the current folder display on  
the radio display.  
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact  
with those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-40  
and Bluetooth® on page 3-78 for more information.  
2. Press and hold x to go back to the previous  
folder list.  
3-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
Radio Reception  
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception  
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,  
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can  
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to  
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under  
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause  
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.  
Frequency interference and static can occur during  
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone  
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external  
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power  
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item  
from the accessory power outlet.  
AM  
Cellular Phone Usage  
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,  
especially at night. The longer range can cause station  
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio  
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels  
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the  
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and  
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this  
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.  
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the  
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making  
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,  
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes  
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.  
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the  
cellular phone and turn it off.  
FM Stereo  
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).  
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that  
automatically works to reduce interference, some static  
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,  
causing the sound to fade in and out.  
3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Backglass Antenna  
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna  
System  
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window  
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that  
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched  
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the  
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio  
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna  
connector needs to be properly attached to the post  
on the glass.  
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of  
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for  
clear radio reception.  
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM  
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.  
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to  
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM  
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space  
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone  
antenna without interfering with radio reception.  
Chime Level Adjustment  
The radio may be used to adjust the vehicle’s chime  
level. If the radio can be used to change the volume  
level of the chime, press and hold the sixth numbered  
pushbutton or the sixth FAV pushbutton with the ignition  
on and the radio power off. The volume level changes  
between Normal and Loud. The selected volume  
level appears on the radio display.  
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear  
the inside rear window can damage the rear window  
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs  
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not  
clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.  
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory  
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.  
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting  
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting  
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming  
radio reception. Any damage caused to your  
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials  
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
3-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 4  
Driving Your Vehicle  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Defensive Driving  
Your Driving, the Road, and  
the Vehicle  
Defensive driving means “always expect the  
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is  
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are  
for Everyone on page 1-12.  
Driving for Better Fuel Economy  
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some  
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.  
{ CAUTION:  
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.  
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.  
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.  
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,  
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be  
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they  
might do and be ready. In addition:  
Allow enough following distance between you  
and the driver in front of you.  
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,  
use cruise control, if equipped.  
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more  
slowly when conditions require.  
Focus on the task of driving.  
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.  
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in  
injury or possible death. These simple defensive  
driving techniques could save your life.  
Combine several trips into a single trip.  
Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same  
TPC Spec number molded into the tire’s sidewall  
near the size.  
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor  
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,  
these deaths are the result of someone who was  
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than  
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been  
associated with the use of alcohol, with about  
250,000 people injured.  
Drunk Driving  
{ CAUTION:  
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.  
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and  
judgment can be affected by even a small amount  
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even  
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not  
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been  
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a  
group, designate a driver who will not drink.  
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every  
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,  
psychological, and developmental reasons for  
these laws.  
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway  
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and  
then drive.  
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s  
system can make crash injuries worse, especially  
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means  
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver  
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of  
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the  
person had not been drinking.  
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  
a global tragedy.  
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a  
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and  
attentiveness.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly  
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement  
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet,  
dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;  
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake  
force applied.  
Control of a Vehicle  
The following three systems help to control the vehicle  
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.  
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask  
more of those control systems than the tires and road can  
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.  
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive  
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy  
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.  
This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to  
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out  
much faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace  
with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances  
eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means  
better braking and longer brake life.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications  
on page 5-3.  
Braking  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34.  
Braking action involves perception time and reaction  
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception  
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.  
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,  
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes  
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.  
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake  
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied.  
Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to  
stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.  
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.  
But that is only an average. It might be less with one  
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with  
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,  
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and  
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,  
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet  
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,  
so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others  
is important.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications  
on page 5-3.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as  
required, faster than any driver could. This can help  
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.  
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an  
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a  
braking skid.  
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps  
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking  
pressure accordingly.  
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to  
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor  
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going  
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal  
moves a little. This is normal.  
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to  
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease  
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in  
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply  
the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.  
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even  
with ABS.  
If there is a problem with  
ABS, this warning light  
stays on. See Antilock  
Using ABS  
page 3-35.  
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal  
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or  
motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal  
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.  
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.  
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam  
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what  
happens with ABS:  
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.  
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer  
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Braking in Emergencies  
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)  
The vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control  
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, traction  
and stability control systems and helps the driver  
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most  
driving conditions.  
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same  
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than  
even the very best braking.  
Brake Assist  
When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,  
the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure  
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt  
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean  
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should  
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).  
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to  
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed  
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the  
stability system hydraulic brake control module to  
supplement the power brake system under conditions  
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied  
the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow  
down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic  
brake control module increases brake pressure at each  
corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor  
brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this  
time is normal and the driver should continue to  
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates  
The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage  
when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal  
pressure is quickly decreased.  
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS  
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE  
ESC message will be displayed.  
For more information, see Driver Information Center  
(DIC) on page 3-43.  
This light will flash on the  
instrument panel cluster  
when the ESC system  
is both on and activated.  
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this  
is normal.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC  
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will  
not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of  
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.  
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION  
OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and  
the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver  
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.  
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal  
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn  
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or  
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to  
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system  
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where  
high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck  
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is  
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.  
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,  
especially in slippery road conditions, the system should  
always be left on. But, ESC can be turned off if needed.  
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins  
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the  
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise  
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control  
system may be re-engaged when road conditions  
allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.  
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that  
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and  
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will be  
on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and  
requires service. If the problem does not clear after  
restarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for  
more information.  
The ESC/TCS button is  
located on the instrument  
panel.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.  
The traction control system can be turned off or back on  
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction  
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When this light is on  
solid and either the  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
SERVICE TRACTION or  
TRACTION OFF message  
is displayed, the system  
will not limit wheel spin.  
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)  
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in  
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it  
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much  
or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens,  
the system works the front brakes and reduces  
engine power by closing the throttle and managing  
engine spark to limit wheel spin.  
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
This light will flash when  
the traction control system  
is limiting wheel spin.  
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled  
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,  
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the  
system enabled. TCS can be turned off if needed.  
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal  
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn  
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or  
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to  
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the  
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions  
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle  
The system may be heard or felt while it is working,  
but this is normal.  
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to  
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically  
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when  
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To turn the system off or  
on, press and release this  
button located on the  
center console.  
the differential could be damaged. The repairs would  
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce  
engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)  
excessively while these lights and this message  
are displayed.  
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is  
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with  
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,  
it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.  
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do  
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the  
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book  
for additional information.  
The DIC will display the appropriate message as  
described previously when the button is pressed.  
Traction Control Operation  
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine  
power to the wheels (engine speed management)  
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel  
(brake-traction control) as necessary.  
The traction control system may activate on dry or  
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy  
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts  
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction  
in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration  
may be heard. This is normal.  
The traction control system is enabled automatically  
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash  
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION  
message if it senses either of the front wheels are  
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.  
For more information on the LOW TRACTION message,  
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system  
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise  
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control  
may be re-engaged when road conditions allow.  
See Cruise Control on page 3-10.  
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to  
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and  
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or  
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed,  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Steering Tips  
Steering  
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.  
Electric Power Steering  
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires  
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is  
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is  
the one factor that can be controlled.  
If the vehicle has the electric power steering system and  
the engine stalls while driving, the power steering assist  
system will continue to operate until you are able to stop  
the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost because the  
electric power steering system is not functioning, the  
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.  
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering  
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.  
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the  
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to  
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate  
gently into the straightaway.  
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several  
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the  
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you  
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.  
The normal amount of power steering assist should return  
shortly after a few normal steering movements.  
Steering in Emergencies  
There are times when steering can be more effective than  
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a  
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out  
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked  
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems  
can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time.  
But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is  
no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering  
around the problem.  
The electric power steering system does not require  
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system  
problems, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.  
Hydraulic Power Steering  
If the vehicle has the hydraulic power steering system  
and power steering assist is lost because the engine  
stops or the power steering system is not functioning,  
the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.  
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies  
like these. First apply the brakes — but, unless  
the vehicle has antilock brakes, not enough to  
lock the wheels. See Braking on page 4-4.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a  
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or  
right depending on the space available.  
Off-Road Recovery  
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a  
road onto the shoulder while driving.  
An emergency like this requires close attention and a  
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the  
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned  
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing  
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and  
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have  
avoided the object.  
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the  
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,  
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the  
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,  
8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front  
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering  
wheel to go straight down the roadway.  
The fact that such emergency situations are always  
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving  
at all times and wear safety belts properly.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Skidding  
Passing  
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.  
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving  
those conditions. But skids are always possible.  
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be  
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:  
Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads  
for situations that might affect a successful pass.  
If in doubt, wait.  
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s  
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels  
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too  
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip  
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,  
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.  
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and  
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.  
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side  
of the lane.  
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to  
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.  
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only  
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is  
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing  
your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.  
When you are being passed, ease to the right.  
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want  
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,  
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for  
a second skid if it occurs.  
Loss of Control  
Let us review what driving experts say about what  
happens when the three control systems — brakes,  
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction  
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver  
has asked.  
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,  
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow  
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is  
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because  
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control  
more limited.  
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer  
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less  
danger.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,  
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or  
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting  
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause  
the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface  
is slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to  
recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice,  
or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored  
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.  
Slow down and keep more space between you and  
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up  
so much road ahead.  
Watch for animals.  
When tired, pull off the road.  
Do not wear sunglasses.  
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.  
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps  
avoid only the braking skid.  
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle  
clean — inside and out.  
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns  
or curves.  
Driving at Night  
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.  
But, as we get older, these differences increase.  
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much  
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.  
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because  
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or  
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.  
Night driving tips include:  
Drive defensively.  
Do not drink and drive.  
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside  
rearview mirror.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hydroplaning  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under  
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.  
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are  
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,  
it has little or no contact with the road.  
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction  
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate.  
Always drive slower in these types of driving  
conditions and avoid driving through large puddles  
and deep-standing or flowing water.  
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.  
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.  
{ CAUTION:  
Other Rainy Weather Tips  
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not  
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling  
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.  
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips  
include:  
Allow extra following distance.  
After driving through a large puddle of water or a  
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until  
the brakes work normally.  
Pass with caution.  
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.  
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.  
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.  
Driving through flowing water could cause your  
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and  
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore  
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to  
drive through flowing water.  
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires  
on page 5-51.  
Turn off cruise control.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Highway Hypnosis  
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having  
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.  
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings  
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a  
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.  
Things to check on your own include:  
Other driving tips include:  
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?  
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.  
Keep interior temperature cool.  
Windows clean — inside and outside?  
Wiper Blades: In good shape?  
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?  
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?  
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road  
ahead and to the sides.  
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle  
instruments often.  
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to  
recommended pressure?  
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?  
Have up-to-date maps?  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hill and Mountain Roads  
{ CAUTION:  
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different  
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving  
in these conditions include:  
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition  
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the  
work of slowing down and they could get so hot  
that they would not work well. You would then  
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.  
You could crash. Always have the engine running  
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.  
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.  
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling  
system, and transmission.  
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.  
{ CAUTION:  
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut  
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds  
that let you stay in your own lane.  
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so  
hot that they would not work well. You would then  
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.  
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine  
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.  
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your  
lane (stalled car, accident).  
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks  
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or  
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery  
roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry  
pavement.  
Winter Driving  
Driving on Snow or Ice  
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the  
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice  
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain  
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid  
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be  
treated with salt or sand.  
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road  
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on  
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface  
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when  
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering  
maneuvers and braking while on ice.  
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate  
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly  
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under  
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.  
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.  
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too  
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface  
under the tires even more.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Blizzard Conditions  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.  
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.  
If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program  
on page 7-7. To get help and keep everyone in the  
vehicle safe:  
Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on  
the side of the vehicle that is away from the  
wind to bring in fresh air.  
Fully open the air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel.  
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting  
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and  
set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
See Climate Control System in the Index.  
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.  
{ CAUTION:  
For more information about carbon monoxide,  
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.  
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.  
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.  
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)  
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause  
unconsciousness and even death.  
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.  
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas  
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.  
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not  
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from  
around the base of your vehicle, especially any  
that is blocking the exhaust.  
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:  
Clear away snow from around the base of  
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking  
the exhaust pipe.  
Check again from time to time to be sure  
snow does not collect there.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to  
keep warm, but be careful.  
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to  
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction  
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction  
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off  
and use the rocking method.  
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as  
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off  
and close the window most of the way to save heat.  
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel  
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about  
to keep warm also helps.  
{ CAUTION:  
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then  
when you run the engine, push the accelerator  
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle  
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart  
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.  
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.  
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,  
they can explode, and you or others could be  
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an  
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin  
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going  
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the  
speedometer.  
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,  
Mud, Ice, or Snow  
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,  
see Tire Chains on page 5-74.  
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the  
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out  
Loading the Vehicle  
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the  
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction  
or stability system. Shift back and forth between  
R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as  
little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait  
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.  
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press  
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission  
is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and  
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could  
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out  
after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the  
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing  
Your Vehicle on page 4-26.  
It is very important to know how much weight  
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the  
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of  
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed  
options. Two labels on the vehicle show how much  
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading  
Information label and the Vehicle Certification label.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or  
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on  
the vehicle can break, and it can change  
the way your vehicle handles. These could  
cause you to lose control and crash.  
Also, overloading can shorten the life of  
the vehicle.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists  
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and  
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).  
For more information on tires and inflation, see  
on page 5-59.  
Tire and Loading Information Label  
There is also important loading information on the  
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle,  
see “Certification Label” later in this section.  
Label Example  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information  
label is attached to the vehicle’s center  
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open,  
you will find the label attached below the door  
lock post (striker). The Tire and Loading  
Information label lists the number of occupant  
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle  
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
Steps for Determining Correct  
Load Limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load  
from your trailer will be transferred to your  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity for your vehicle.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers that will be riding in your  
vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a  
Trailer on page 4-29 for important information  
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and  
trailering tips.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity is  
650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 1  
Description  
Example 2  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Item  
Total  
Maximum Vehicle  
Capacity Weight for  
Example 1 =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 150 lbs  
(68 kg) × 2 =  
Maximum Vehicle  
Capacity Weight for  
Example 2 =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 150 lbs  
(68 kg) × 5 =  
1,000 lbs  
1,000 lbs  
A
A
(453 kg)  
(453 kg)  
300 lbs  
(136 kg)  
750 lbs  
(340 kg)  
B
C
B
C
Available Occupant and 700 lbs  
Cargo Weight = (317 kg)  
250 lbs  
(113 kg)  
Available Cargo Weight =  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Certification Label  
Example 3  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Maximum Vehicle  
Capacity Weight for  
Example 3 =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 200 lbs  
(91 kg) × 5 =  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
A
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to  
the driver side center pillar.  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
B
C
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your  
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating  
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of  
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and tongue  
weight if pulling a trailer.  
Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg)  
Refer to the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information  
label for specific information about your vehicle’s  
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating  
positions. The combined weight of the driver,  
passengers, and cargo should never exceed the  
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.  
Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle or the  
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the  
front or rear axle.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or  
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on  
the vehicle can break, and it can change  
the way your vehicle handles. These could  
cause you to lose control and crash.  
Also, overloading can shorten the life of the  
vehicle.  
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike  
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or  
in a crash.  
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.  
In a trunk, put them as far forward as you  
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.  
Never stack heavier things, like  
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some  
of them are above the tops of the seats.  
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint  
in the vehicle.  
When you carry something inside the  
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.  
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause  
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.  
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or  
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will  
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to  
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will  
keep going.  
Do not leave a seat folded down unless  
you need to.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Here are some important things to consider before  
recreational vehicle towing:  
Towing  
What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?  
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s  
recommendations.  
Towing Your Vehicle  
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed  
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your  
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the  
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside  
Assistance Program on page 7-7.  
How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles  
have restrictions on how far and how long they  
can tow.  
Does the vehicle have the proper towing  
equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering  
professional for additional advice and equipment  
recommendations.  
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for  
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,  
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.  
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing  
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is  
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a  
Long Trip on page 4-15.  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle  
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.  
The two most common types of recreational vehicle  
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.  
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels  
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with  
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a  
device known as a dolly.  
Dinghy Towing  
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the  
beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for  
about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of  
transmission components.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.  
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).  
7. Release the parking brake.  
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once the  
destination has been reached.  
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while  
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never  
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.  
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four  
wheels on the ground:  
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the  
towing vehicle.  
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the  
ignition to LOCK/OFF.  
3. Set the parking brake.  
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the  
vehicle is being towed, remove the following  
fuse from the instrument panel fuse block:  
on page 5-99 for more information.  
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could  
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the  
vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed  
from the rear.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Remove the key from the ignition.  
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.  
7. Release the parking brake.  
Dolly Towing  
Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the ground  
and the front wheels on a dolly:  
To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and  
a dolly:  
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could  
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the  
vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from  
the rear.  
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.  
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).  
3. Set the parking brake.  
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead  
position with a clamping device designed for towing.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with  
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the  
trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in  
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.  
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle  
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,  
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.  
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,  
and it has to be used properly.  
Towing a Trailer  
{ CAUTION:  
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if  
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is  
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is  
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or  
even at all. The driver and passengers could be  
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be  
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only  
if all the steps in this section have been followed.  
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information  
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.  
The following information has many time-tested,  
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of  
these are important for the safety of the driver and  
the passengers. So please read this section carefully  
before pulling a trailer.  
Load-pulling components such as the engine,  
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are  
forced to work harder against the drag of the added  
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively  
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating  
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind  
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.  
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the  
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered  
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,  
follow the advice in this section and see your  
dealer/retailer for important information about  
towing a trailer with the vehicle.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Three important considerations have to do with weight:  
the weight of the trailer,  
Pulling A Trailer  
Here are some important points:  
the weight of the trailer tongue  
There are many different laws, including speed limit  
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure  
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but  
also where you will be driving. A good source for  
this information can be state or provincial police.  
and the total weight on the vehicle’s tires.  
Weight of the Trailer  
How heavy can a trailer safely be?  
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles  
(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,  
transmission or other parts could be damaged.  
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle’s  
warranty.  
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).  
But even that can be too heavy.  
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,  
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how  
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all  
important. It can depend on any special equipment on  
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle  
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in  
this section for more information.  
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a  
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)  
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps  
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at  
the heavier loads.  
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the  
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required  
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional  
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle  
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.  
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.  
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted  
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph  
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.  
Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is  
above 100°F (38°C).  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or  
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.  
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for  
more information.  
Weight of the Trailer Tongue  
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight  
to measure because it affects the total gross weight  
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)  
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo  
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the  
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,  
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the  
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also  
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a  
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW  
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.  
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20 for more  
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.  
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)  
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer  
weight (B).  
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the  
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.  
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving  
some items around in the trailer.  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires  
Safety Chains  
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit  
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the  
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-20. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for  
the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.  
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the  
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of  
the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the  
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions  
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch  
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the  
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety  
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always  
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow  
safety chains to drag on the ground.  
Hitches  
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.  
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads  
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.  
Here are some rules to follow:  
Trailer Brakes  
The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended  
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or  
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a  
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the  
bumper.  
Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to  
tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you  
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.  
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read  
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so  
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them  
properly.  
Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle  
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are,  
then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch  
is removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,  
and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaust  
can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on  
page 2-35 in the Index for more information.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving with a Trailer  
Passing  
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.  
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open  
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and  
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always  
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now  
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.  
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.  
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much  
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to  
the lane.  
Backing Up  
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and  
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,  
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric  
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then  
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the  
brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection  
at the same time.  
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.  
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand  
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your  
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,  
have someone guide you.  
Making Turns  
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the  
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes  
are still working.  
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering  
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the  
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid  
making very sharp turns while trailering.  
Following Distance  
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than  
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft  
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.  
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in  
advance.  
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as  
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.  
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy  
braking and sudden turns.  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer  
Parking on Hills  
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever  
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the  
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle  
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.  
{ CAUTION:  
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer  
attached can be dangerous. If something goes  
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be  
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be  
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a  
flat surface.  
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument  
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are  
burned out. For this reason you may think other  
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is  
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer  
bulbs are still working.  
Driving on Grades  
If parking the rig on a hill:  
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades  
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher  
than normal engine and transmission temperatures  
may result and damage the vehicle. Frequent  
stops are very important to allow the engine and  
transmission to cool.  
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)  
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill  
or into traffic if facing uphill.  
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.  
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the  
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.  
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting  
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission  
is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so  
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.  
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking  
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).  
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the  
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce  
the possibility of the engine and the transmission  
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine  
Overheating on page 5-34.  
5. Release the brake pedal.  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Leaving After Parking on a Hill  
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing  
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:  
start the engine,  
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during  
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on  
page 5-34.  
shift into a gear, and  
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing  
release the parking brake.  
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,  
be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the  
vehicle before changing the tire.  
2. Let up on the brake pedal.  
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.  
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the  
chocks.  
Maintenance When Trailer Towing  
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a  
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
for more information. Things that are especially  
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission  
fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake  
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and  
during the trip.  
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts  
are tight.  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories and Modifications  
Service  
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added  
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and  
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,  
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,  
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,  
traction control, and stability control. Some of these  
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage  
not covered by the vehicle warranty.  
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.  
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained  
and supported service people.  
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:  
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the  
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including  
control module modifications, are not covered under the  
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining  
warranty coverage for affected parts.  
GM Accessories are designed to complement and  
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM  
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine  
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/  
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know  
that GM-trained and supported service technicians  
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.  
Vehicle on page 1-72.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
California Proposition 65 Warning  
Doing Your Own Service Work  
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or  
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause  
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including  
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some  
component wear by-products contain and/or emit  
these chemicals.  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be injured and the vehicle could be  
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle  
without knowing enough about it.  
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,  
experience, the proper replacement parts,  
and tools before attempting any vehicle  
maintenance task.  
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and  
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners  
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners  
are used, parts can later break or fall off.  
You could be hurt.  
California Perchlorate Materials  
Requirements  
Certain types of automotive applications, such as  
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium  
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,  
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling  
may be necessary. For additional information, see  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper  
service manual. It tells you much more about how to  
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the  
proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering  
Information on page 7-16.  
Fuel  
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of  
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the  
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,  
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as  
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting  
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-71.  
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
shows the code letter or number that identifies  
the vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of  
the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN) on page 5-97.  
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the  
mileage and the date of any service work performed.  
See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.  
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K),  
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel  
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85  
(85% Ethanol) on page 5-8. In all other engines, use only  
the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane  
on page 5-6.  
Adding Equipment to the Outside of  
the Vehicle  
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the  
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can  
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.  
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment  
to the outside of the vehicle.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gasoline Octane  
Gasoline Specifications  
If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B),  
the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K), or the 3.5L V6 engine  
(VIN Code N), use regular unleaded gasoline with a  
posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is  
less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking noise  
when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.  
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher  
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at  
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the  
engine needs service.  
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification  
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in  
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing  
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese  
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of  
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7  
for additional information.  
California Fuel  
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions  
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet  
California specifications. See the underhood emission  
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting  
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate  
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but  
emission control system performance might be affected.  
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the  
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38. If this occurs, return to your  
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined  
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,  
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),  
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane  
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer  
towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane  
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,  
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you  
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,  
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as  
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or  
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs  
service.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and  
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in  
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,  
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.  
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing  
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that  
were not designed for those fuels.  
Additives  
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States  
are now required to contain additives that help prevent  
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing  
the emission control system to work properly. In most  
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.  
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum  
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental  
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors  
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences  
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline  
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that  
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing  
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel  
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.  
That damage would not be covered under the  
vehicle warranty.  
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent  
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System  
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine  
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors  
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS  
is the only gasoline additive recommended by General  
Motors.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for  
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing  
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese  
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy  
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend  
against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT  
can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance  
of the emission control system could be affected.  
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this  
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.  
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help  
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel  
(E85) pump available. The U. S. Department of Energy  
has an alternative fuels website (www.eere.energy.gov/  
afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find  
E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have  
a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if  
the ethanol content is greater than 85%.  
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)  
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
shows the code letter or number that identifies the  
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the  
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN) on page 5-97.  
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification  
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85  
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.  
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet  
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could  
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.  
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K),  
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol  
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on  
page 5-5. In all other engines, use only the unleaded  
gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 5-6.  
Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine  
(VIN Code K) can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85).  
We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are  
designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”  
fuel, meaning it is made from renewable sources such  
as corn and other crops.  
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel  
must be formulated properly for your climate according  
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble  
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel  
is not properly formulated for your climate. If this  
happens, switching to gasoline or adding gasoline  
to the fuel tank can improve starting.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F (0°C),  
the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more  
than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate repeatedly  
between gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels,  
it is recommended that you add as much fuel as  
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with  
E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system.  
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused  
by additives would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L)  
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately  
after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the  
vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.  
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel  
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing  
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel  
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.  
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle  
warranty.  
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you  
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85  
than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the Tank  
on page 5-10.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuels in Foreign Countries  
Filling the Tank  
If you plan on driving in another country outside the  
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard  
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel  
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly  
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not  
be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
{ CAUTION:  
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can  
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you  
and others, read and follow all the instructions on  
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are  
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or  
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.  
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away  
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended  
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law  
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while  
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel  
pump; never let children pump fuel.  
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or  
contact a major oil company that does business in  
the country where you will be driving.  
The fuel door is located on the passenger side of the  
vehicle.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in  
and release and it will open.  
To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly  
counterclockwise. If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,  
the fuel cap will be yellow and state that E85 or gasoline  
can be used. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-8.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the  
hook on the fuel door.  
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),  
the CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap  
is not properly installed.  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap  
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something  
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray  
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more  
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and  
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the  
cap all the way.  
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not  
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by  
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station  
attendant. Leave the area immediately.  
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get  
the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one  
for you. If you get the wrong type, it might not fit  
properly. This can cause the malfunction indicator  
lamp to light and can damage the fuel tank and  
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
on page 3-38.  
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the  
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished  
pumping the fuel before removing the nozzle. Clean  
fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible.  
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93.  
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the clockwise  
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.  
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap  
has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow  
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside  
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.  
Contact should be maintained until the filling  
is complete.  
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.  
Do not use a cellular phone while  
pumping fuel.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the  
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the  
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be  
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this  
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:  
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.  
Do not fill a container while it is inside a  
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on  
any surface other than the ground.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hood Release  
Checking Things Under  
the Hood  
To open the hood, do the following:  
1. Pull the hood release  
handle with this symbol  
on it. It is located  
inside the vehicle to  
the left of the steering  
column.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric fan under the hood can start up and  
injure you even when the engine is not running.  
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any  
underhood electric fan.  
{ CAUTION:  
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and  
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,  
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other  
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could  
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things  
that will burn onto a hot engine.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Lift the hood.  
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to  
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,  
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the  
hood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,  
then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make  
sure the hood is closed and repeat the process  
if necessary.  
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the  
secondary hood release handle toward the driver  
side of the vehicle.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Compartment Overview  
When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you see:  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26.  
F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28.  
B. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on  
page 5-28.  
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake  
Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39.  
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”  
H. See Battery on page 5-42.  
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.  
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding  
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid  
on page 5-38.  
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking  
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-21.  
E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on  
page 5-29.  
page 5-102.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, this is what you see:  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26.  
G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28.  
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering  
Fluid on page 5-36.  
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake  
Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39.  
C. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on  
page 5-28.  
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap/Dipstick (Out of  
page 5-28.  
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”  
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.  
J. See Battery on page 5-42.  
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”  
page 5-102.  
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.  
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on  
page 5-29.  
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding  
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid  
on page 5-38.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, this is what you see:  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26.  
Engine Oil  
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering  
Fluid on page 5-36.  
Checking Engine Oil  
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”  
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each  
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must  
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.  
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.  
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”  
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.  
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16  
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.  
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View).  
See Cooling System on page 5-28.  
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on  
page 5-29.  
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes  
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done,  
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.  
G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28.  
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake  
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or  
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it  
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.  
Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39.  
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).  
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic  
Transmission Fluid on page 5-28.  
J. See Battery on page 5-42.  
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Engine Compartment  
Fuse Block on page 5-102.  
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding  
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid  
on page 5-38.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine  
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the  
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,  
the engine could be damaged.  
When to Add Engine Oil  
Overview on page 5-16  
for the location of the  
engine oil fill cap.  
L4 Engine  
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper  
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in  
when through.  
V6 Engine  
If the oil is below the MIN mark for the L4 engine or  
below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick  
for the V6 engine, add at least one quart/liter of the  
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil  
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities  
and Specifications on page 5-108.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol  
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use  
Oils meeting these  
Look for three things:  
requirements should have  
the starburst symbol on  
the container. This symbol  
indicates that the oil has  
been certified by the  
American Petroleum  
Institute (API).  
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting  
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American  
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines  
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended  
oil can result in engine damage not covered by  
the vehicle warranty.  
Cold Temperature Operation  
GM6094M  
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.  
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature  
falls below 20°F (29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30  
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide  
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low  
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required  
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine  
Oil to Use” for more information.  
SAE 5W-30  
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers  
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.  
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the system has calculated that oil life has been  
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.  
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. Change the oil  
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).  
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the  
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is  
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and  
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this  
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has  
trained service people who will perform this work using  
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to  
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.  
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil  
Flushes  
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended  
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard  
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance  
and engine protection.  
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and  
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
Engine Oil Life System  
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be  
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil  
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever  
the oil is changed.  
When to Change Engine Oil  
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates  
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based  
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not  
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at  
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.  
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must  
be reset every time the oil is changed.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life  
System  
What to Do with Used Oil  
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be  
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.  
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean  
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand  
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags  
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s  
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.  
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change  
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever  
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate  
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs  
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON  
message being turned on, reset the system.  
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you  
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from  
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting  
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,  
or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking  
it to a place that collects used oil.  
After changing the engine oil, reset the system:  
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.  
2. Press and hold both the INFO and reset buttons  
for at least one second to access the  
personalization menu and display the OIL LIFE  
RESET message.  
3. Press and hold the reset button for at least  
one second. An ACKNOWLEDGED message  
will appear when the system has been reset.  
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.  
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on  
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system  
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the  
following:  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for  
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.  
When to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II  
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each  
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you  
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at  
each engine oil change.  
How to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from  
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose  
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new  
filter is required.  
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.  
2. Lift off the cover.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{ CAUTION:  
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter  
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air  
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop  
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and  
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not  
drive with it off, and be careful working on the  
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.  
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can  
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get  
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have  
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.  
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.  
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.  
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim of  
the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn the  
cover down to close it.  
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover is  
properly seated.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Transmission Fluid  
Cooling System  
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.  
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.  
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealer/retailer  
and have it repaired as soon as possible.  
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the  
correct working temperature.  
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in  
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure  
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission  
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may  
not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always  
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in  
For the 2.4L, 3.5L and 3.6L engines, the transmission  
fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless the  
transmission is at operating temperature. If you need  
to check the transmission fluid level, please take your  
vehicle to your dealer/retailer.  
3.5L V6 Engine shown, 2.4L L4,  
3.6L V6 Engines similar  
A. Engine Cooling Fans  
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank  
C. Pressure Cap  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can  
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator  
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could  
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)  
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs  
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in  
the vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can  
start up even when the engine is not running and  
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
Engine Coolant  
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with  
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed  
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles  
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.  
{ CAUTION:  
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,  
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you  
can be burned.  
The following explains the cooling system and how to  
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem  
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on  
page 5-34.  
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run  
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could  
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.  
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing  
else needs to be added. This mixture:  
What to Use  
Gives freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C),  
{ CAUTION:  
outside temperature.  
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),  
engine temperature.  
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can  
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid  
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant  
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system  
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain  
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could  
get too hot but you would not get the overheat  
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or  
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of  
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
Protects against rust and corrosion.  
Will not damage aluminum parts.  
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.  
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,  
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.  
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze  
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and  
other parts.  
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used  
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could  
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of  
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the  
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Coolant  
How to Add Coolant to the  
Recovery Tank  
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking  
the coolant level.  
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery  
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank  
is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.  
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above  
the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant  
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool  
before this is done. See Engine Coolant on page 5-29  
for more information.  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.  
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.  
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD  
mark on the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have  
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater  
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the  
cooling system.  
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill  
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could  
cause the engine to overheat and be severely  
damaged.  
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to  
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool  
before this is done.  
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator  
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when  
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank  
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer  
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise  
about two or two and one-half turns.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can  
start up even when the engine is not running and  
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will  
allow any pressure still left to be vented out  
the discharge hose.  
2. Then keep turning the  
pressure cap slowly,  
and remove it.  
{ CAUTION:  
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are  
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank  
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out  
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling  
system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is  
hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank  
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the  
pressure cap.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,  
to the FULL COLD mark. Wait about five minutes,  
then check to see if the level is below the mark. If the  
level is below the FULL COLD mark, add additional  
coolant to bring the level up to the mark. Repeat this  
procedure until the level remains constant at the  
FULL COLD mark for at least five minutes.  
Pressure Cap  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may  
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly  
secured.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for  
more information on location.  
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start  
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper  
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine  
cooling fans.  
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant  
surge tank might be lower. If the level is lower than  
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper  
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level  
reaches the FULL COLD mark.  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may  
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly  
secured.  
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully  
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for more  
information on location.  
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the  
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may  
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly  
secured.  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine  
Compartment  
Engine Overheating  
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine  
overheating.  
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage as  
well as an engine coolant temperature warning light  
on your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine  
{ CAUTION:  
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you  
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away  
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming  
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the  
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign  
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.  
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning  
appears, but instead get service help right away.  
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.  
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle  
is parked on a level surface.  
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is  
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or  
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if  
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the  
engine is cool.  
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are  
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should  
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run  
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.  
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine  
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.  
on page 5-36 for information on driving to a safe  
place in an emergency.  
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving  
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.  
The costly repairs would not be covered by the  
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection  
Operating Mode on page 5-36 for information on  
driving to a safe place in an emergency.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the  
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer  
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive  
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe  
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the  
warning does not come back on, continue to drive  
normally.  
If No Steam Is Coming From The  
Engine Compartment  
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam  
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too  
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too  
hot when the vehicle:  
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the  
vehicle right away.  
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.  
Stops after high-speed driving.  
Idles for long periods in traffic.  
Tows a trailer.  
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for  
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still  
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.  
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating  
Mode” following.  
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of  
steam:  
1. Turn the air off.  
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and  
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as  
necessary.  
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)  
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the  
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let  
the engine idle.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overheated Engine Protection  
Operating Mode  
Power Steering Fluid  
Overview on page 5-16 for  
reservoir location.  
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle  
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.  
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat  
protection mode which alternates firing groups of  
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,  
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine  
performance. The temperature gage will indicate an  
overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles (km)  
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode  
should be avoided.  
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine  
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,  
allow the engine to cool before attempting any  
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.  
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil  
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil  
on page 5-21.  
When to Check Power Steering Fluid  
Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with V6  
engines. Vehicles with the 4-cylinder engine have electric  
power steering and do not use power steering fluid.  
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering  
fluid unless a leak is suspected in the system, or  
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system  
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected  
and repaired.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
at the MAX mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is  
at the MIN mark when the engine is cold or hot, power  
steering fluid should be added.  
How to Check Power Steering Fluid  
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:  
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment  
cool down.  
The fluid level should be within the crosshatch area on  
the dipstick.  
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.  
If the fluid is at or below the ADD or MIN mark on  
the dipstick, add just enough fluid to bring the level  
within the crosshatch area.  
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a  
clean rag.  
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.  
What to Use  
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on  
the dipstick.  
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see  
Always use the proper fluid.  
If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine, the fluid level  
should be between the ADD and HOT marks when the  
engine is cold, and at the HOT mark when the engine  
is hot. If the fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine  
is cold or hot, power steering fluid should be added.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the  
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by  
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid  
on page 6-12.  
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluid  
level should be between the MIN (Minimum) and  
MAX (Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice:  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
What to Use  
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow  
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.  
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.  
Water can cause the solution to freeze and  
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of  
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as  
well as washer fluid.  
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read  
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be  
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature  
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient  
protection against freezing.  
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters  
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid  
expansion if freezing occurs, which could  
damage the tank if it is completely full.  
Adding Washer Fluid  
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,  
a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on  
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-46 for more information.  
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your  
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s  
windshield washer system and paint.  
Open the cap with the  
washer symbol on it.  
Add washer fluid until the  
tank is full. See Engine  
on page 5-16 for reservoir  
location.  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not  
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings  
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new  
brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid,  
as necessary, only when work is done on the brake  
hydraulic system.  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
The brake master cylinder  
reservoir is filled with DOT  
3 brake fluid. See Engine  
page 5-16 for the location  
of the reservoir.  
{ CAUTION:  
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on  
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.  
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle  
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when  
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.  
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in  
the reservoir might go down:  
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake  
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning  
Light on page 3-34.  
The brake fluid level goes down because of normal  
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,  
the fluid level goes back up.  
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also  
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic  
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner  
or later the brakes will not work well.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
What to Add  
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake  
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a  
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine  
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage  
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they  
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone  
put in the wrong kind of fluid.  
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.  
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the  
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep  
dirt from entering the reservoir.  
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted  
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.  
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.  
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing  
Your Vehicle on page 5-93.  
{ CAUTION:  
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic  
system, the brakes might not work well. This could  
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect  
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts  
in the proper sequence to torque specifications  
Brake Wear  
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have  
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning  
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads  
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard  
all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying  
the brake pedal firmly.  
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  
axle sets.  
Brake Pedal Travel  
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not  
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase  
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service  
might be required.  
{ CAUTION:  
The brake wear warning sound means that soon  
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an  
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is  
heard, have the vehicle serviced.  
Brake Adjustment  
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the  
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.  
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake  
pads could result in costly brake repair.  
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake  
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.  
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing Brake System Parts  
Vehicle Storage  
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many  
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if  
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle  
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.  
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for  
example, when the brake linings wear down and new  
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved  
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might  
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in  
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance  
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the  
worse. The braking performance expected can change in  
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts  
are installed.  
{ CAUTION:  
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that  
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not  
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-43 for tips  
on working around a battery without getting hurt.  
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,  
remove the black, negative () cable from the battery.  
This helps keep the battery from running down.  
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,  
remove the black, negative () cable from the battery or  
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the  
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.  
Battery  
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is  
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one  
that has the replacement number shown on the original  
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on  
page 5-16 for battery location.  
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related  
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California to cause  
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt  
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can  
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems  
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.  
Jump Starting  
If the battery has run down, you may want to use  
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your  
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.  
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching  
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground  
connection you do not want. You would not be able  
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could  
damage the electrical systems.  
{ CAUTION:  
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous  
because:  
They contain acid that can burn you.  
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.  
They contain enough electricity to burn you.  
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,  
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved  
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic  
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission  
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.  
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or  
all of these things can hurt you.  
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories  
on during the jump starting procedure, they could  
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by  
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other  
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.  
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly  
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered  
by the warranty.  
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug  
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the  
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will  
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it  
could save the radio!  
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it  
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.  
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt  
battery with a negative ground system.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the  
positive (+) and negative () terminal locations on  
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is  
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.  
The negative (–) terminal is located under a  
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for more  
information on location. Flip the caps up to access  
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.  
{ CAUTION:  
Using a match near a battery can cause battery  
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,  
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if  
you need more light.  
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not  
need to add water to the battery installed in your  
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be  
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,  
add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,  
explosive gas could be present.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric fan can start up even when the engine  
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,  
clothing and tools away from any underhood  
electric fan.  
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.  
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in  
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with  
water and get medical help immediately.  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote  
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
{ CAUTION:  
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to  
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a  
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you  
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts  
once the engine is running.  
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to the  
negative () terminal of the good battery. Use a  
remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.  
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose  
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a  
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.  
Do not let the other end touch anything until the  
next step. The other end of the negative () cable  
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,  
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
negative () terminal on the vehicle with the  
dead battery.  
Before you connect the cables, here are some  
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to  
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if  
the vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a  
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Do not connect positive (+) to negative () or you  
will get a short that would damage the battery and  
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the  
negative () cable to the negative () terminal on  
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or  
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may  
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not  
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect  
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,  
making sure that the cables do not touch each other  
or other metal.  
9. Connect the other end of the negative () cable at  
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,  
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical  
connection is just as good there, and the chance  
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.  
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  
the engine for a while.  
Jumper Cable Removal  
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.  
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs  
service.  
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote  
Negative (–) Terminal  
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote  
Negative (–) Terminals  
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do  
the following:  
Bulb Replacement  
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see  
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-50.  
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle that had the dead battery.  
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this  
section, contact your dealer/retailer.  
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
Halogen Bulbs  
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other  
vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and  
negative () terminals to their original positions.  
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and  
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or  
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow  
the instructions on the bulb package.  
Headlamp Aiming  
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and  
should need no further adjustment.  
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the  
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the  
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming  
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you  
(for vertical aim).  
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is  
recommended that you take the vehicle to your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and  
Stoplamps  
3. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold the  
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.  
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.  
A. Backup Lamp  
5. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp  
assembly by lifting the release tab.  
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn Signal Lamp  
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.  
7. Pull the bulb from the socket.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more  
information.  
2. Remove the convenience net hooks holding the  
trunk trim.  
8. Install a new bulb.  
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp  
assembly.  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Back-up Lamp  
License Plate Lamp  
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:  
1. Remove the license plate assembly by turning the  
two screws counterclockwise.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more  
information.  
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward  
through the fascia opening.  
2. Remove the push nuts holding the trunk trim.  
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove  
from the lamp assembly.  
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the  
bulb straight out of the socket.  
4. Install the new bulb.  
4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install.  
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.  
5. Replace the license plate lamp by pushing it  
through the fascia opening.  
6. Turn the two screws that hold the license plate  
lamp clockwise to reinstall.  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacement Bulbs  
Exterior Lamp  
Bulb Number  
Back-up Lamp and Taillamp  
License Plate Lamp  
Turn Signal Lamp  
921  
168  
3156  
2. Push the release button.  
3. Slide the blade forward.  
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your  
dealer/retailer.  
4. Turn the blade toward you and continue to slide  
forward to remove.  
Windshield Wiper Blade  
Replacement  
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and  
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the  
locked position.  
Inspect the windshield wiper blades for wear or cracking.  
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.  
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance  
Replacement Parts on page 6-13.  
To remove the wiper blade:  
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from  
the windshield.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires  
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever  
have questions about your tire warranty and where  
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet  
for details. For additional information refer to the tire  
manufacturer.  
Underinflated tires pose the same  
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting  
accident could cause serious injury.  
Check all tires frequently to maintain the  
recommended pressure. Tire pressure  
should be checked when your tires are  
page 5-59.  
{ CAUTION:  
Overinflated tires are more likely to be  
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden  
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.  
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.  
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires  
have been damaged, replace them.  
Poorly maintained and improperly used  
tires are dangerous.  
Overloading your tires can cause  
overheating as a result of too much  
flexing. You could have an air-out and  
a serious accident. See Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-20.  
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-60 for  
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed  
driving.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Low-Profile Performance Tire  
Winter Tires  
If your vehicle has P225/50R18 or P225/50R17  
size tires, they are classified as low-profile  
performance tires. These tires are designed for  
very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement.  
You may also notice more road noise with  
low-profile performance tires and that they  
tend to wear faster.  
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads  
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.  
All season tires provide good overall performance  
on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction  
you would like or the same level of performance  
as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.  
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased  
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter tires,  
there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road  
noise, and shorter tread life. After switching to winter  
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.  
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,  
they are more susceptible to damage from road  
hazards or curb impact than standard profile  
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can  
occur when coming into contact with road  
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,  
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle  
warranty does not cover this type of damage.  
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure  
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,  
potholes, and other road hazards.  
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire  
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying  
New Tires on page 5-68.  
If you choose to use winter tires:  
Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all  
four wheel positions.  
Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load  
range, and speed rating as the original equipment  
tires.  
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original  
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,  
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with  
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum  
speed capability.  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of  
letters and numbers used to define a particular  
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,  
and service description. See the “Tire Size”  
illustration later in this section for more detail.  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded into  
its sidewall. The examples below show a typical  
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare  
tire sidewall.  
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a  
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal  
safety guidelines.  
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):  
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code  
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the  
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards.  
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following DOT (Department of  
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification  
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer  
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was  
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides  
of the tire, although only one side may have the  
date of manufacture.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example  
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire  
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on  
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and  
temperature resistance. For more information see  
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact  
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of  
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should  
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).  
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when  
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your  
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact  
on page 5-75.  
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following the DOT (Department of  
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification  
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer  
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was  
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides  
of the tire, although only one side may have the  
date of manufacture.  
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or  
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi  
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure  
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-59.  
Compact Spare Tire Example  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and  
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect  
ratio, construction type, and service description.  
The letter T as the first character in the tire  
size means the tire is for temporary use only.  
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates  
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall  
to sidewall.  
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that  
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.  
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as  
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean  
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it  
is wide.  
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a  
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal  
safety guidelines.  
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used  
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.  
The letter R means radial ply construction; the  
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;  
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows an example of a  
typical passenger vehicle tire size.  
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in  
inches.  
(F) Service Description: These characters  
represent the load index and speed rating of the  
tire. The load index represents the load carry  
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed  
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified  
to carry a load.  
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States  
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P  
as the first character in the tire size means a  
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards  
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure  
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)  
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat  
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-59.  
Tire Terminology and Definitions  
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the  
tire pressing outward on each square inch of  
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds  
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).  
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle  
with standard and optional equipment including  
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,  
but without passengers and cargo.  
Accessory Weight: This means the combined  
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of  
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,  
power steering, power brakes, power windows,  
power seats, and air conditioning.  
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall  
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance  
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)  
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code  
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an  
alphanumeric designator which can also identify  
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,  
and date of production.  
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height  
to its width.  
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is  
located between the plies and the tread. Cords  
may be made from steel or other reinforcing  
materials.  
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.  
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.  
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped  
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.  
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.  
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies  
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees  
to the centerline of the tread.  
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward  
when mounted on a vehicle.  
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of  
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied  
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-20.  
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.  
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating  
positions.  
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger  
vehicles.  
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that  
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.  
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,  
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,  
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher  
or deeper than the same moldings on the other  
sidewall of the tire.  
Load Index: An assigned number ranging  
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying  
capacity of a tire.  
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum  
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.  
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the  
sidewall.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and  
multipurpose vehicles.  
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire  
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for  
that tire.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle  
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure  
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire  
on page 4-20.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of  
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity  
weight, and production options weight.  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which  
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid  
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.  
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
Standards): A tire information system that  
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s  
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings  
are determined by tire manufacturers using  
government testing procedures. The ratings are  
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform  
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.  
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which  
the tire beads are seated.  
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread  
and the bead.  
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of  
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs  
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading  
the Vehicle on page 4-20.  
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to  
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a  
tire can operate.  
Traction: The friction between the tire and the  
road surface. The amount of grip provided.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on  
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory  
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.  
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into  
contact with the road.  
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached  
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity  
weight and the original equipment tire size and  
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and  
Loading Information Label” under Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-20.  
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes  
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a  
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.  
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67.  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information  
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows  
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the  
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they  
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation  
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum  
amount of air pressure needed to support your  
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.  
Inflation - Tire Pressure  
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to  
operate effectively.  
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that  
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.  
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air  
(under-inflation), you can get the following:  
For additional information regarding how much  
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of  
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading  
the Vehicle on page 4-20. How you load your  
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.  
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it  
was designed to carry.  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Premature or irregular wear  
Poor handling  
Reduced fuel economy  
When to Check  
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),  
you can get the following:  
Unusual wear  
Poor handling  
Rough ride  
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not  
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should  
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information  
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact  
Spare Tire on page 5-89.  
Needless damage from road hazards  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Check  
High-Speed Operation  
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire  
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly  
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires  
may look properly inflated even when they are  
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure  
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle  
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven  
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
{ CAUTION:  
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or  
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained  
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up  
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have  
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some  
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure  
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed  
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle  
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires  
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent  
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation  
pressure for the vehicle load.  
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.  
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a  
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation  
pressure matches the recommended pressure on  
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further  
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure  
is low, add air until you reach the recommended  
amount.  
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on  
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.  
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.  
Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 35 psi (241 kPa) for  
the front and rear tires, when operating your vehicle at  
high-speed conditions. When you end high-speed driving  
return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on  
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the  
page 5-59.  
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve  
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt  
and moisture.  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper  
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to  
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation  
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of  
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.  
Tire Pressure Monitor System  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio  
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.  
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your  
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a  
receiver located in the vehicle.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS  
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is  
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator  
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the  
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for  
approximately one minute and then remain continuously  
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon  
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction  
exists.  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be  
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation  
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on  
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your  
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated  
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you  
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for  
those tires.)  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the  
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire  
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur  
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of  
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle  
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always  
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one  
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the  
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the  
TPMS to continue to function properly.  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been  
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)  
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one  
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale  
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires  
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper  
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated  
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire  
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and  
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling  
and stopping ability.  
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-62 for  
additional information.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) and Industry  
and Science Canada  
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation  
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor  
System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn  
the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists.  
TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel  
assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly.  
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the  
vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings  
to a receiver located in the vehicle.  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates  
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
When a low tire pressure  
condition is detected,  
the TPMS turns on the low  
tire pressure warning light  
located on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and  
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
At the same time a message to check the pressure in  
a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center  
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the  
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle  
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.  
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the  
driver. For additional information and details about the  
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and  
on page 3-46.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in  
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then  
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early  
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting  
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.  
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message  
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of  
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the  
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light  
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the  
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message  
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC  
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the  
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can  
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come  
on are:  
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size  
of your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct  
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are  
cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20, for an  
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its  
location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure  
on page 5-59.  
One of the road tires has been replaced with the  
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS  
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC  
message should go off once you re-install the  
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.  
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low  
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal  
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation  
on page 5-66 and Tires on page 5-51.  
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire  
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor  
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered  
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.  
The TPMS sensor matching process was started but  
not completed or not completed successfully after  
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and  
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS  
sensor matching process is performed successfully.  
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this  
section.  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or  
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS  
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS  
sensors are installed and the sensor matching  
process is performed successfully. See your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
TPMS Sensor Matching Process  
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.  
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors  
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need  
to be matched to the new tire/wheel location. The sensors  
are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in the following  
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,  
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using  
a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for  
service.  
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your  
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires  
and wheels other than those recommended for your  
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning  
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-68.  
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each  
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the  
tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure,  
do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure  
indicated on the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s  
air-pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap,  
a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.  
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities  
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS  
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.  
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or  
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for  
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message  
comes on and stays on.  
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel  
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match  
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops  
and you need to start over.  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:  
1. Set the parking brake.  
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to  
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.  
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and  
repeat the procedure in Step 5.  
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the  
engine off.  
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to  
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.  
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat  
the procedure in Step 5.  
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the  
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS  
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the  
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.  
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver  
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound  
to indicate the tire learning process is done.  
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.  
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side  
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that  
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.  
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn  
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops, or  
if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition switch to  
LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.  
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve  
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing  
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about  
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to  
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then  
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the  
sensor identification code has been matched to  
the tire/wheel position.  
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure  
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading  
Information label.  
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.  
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to  
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.  
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and  
repeat the procedure in Step 5.  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Inspection and Rotation  
We recommend that you regularly inspect your  
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of  
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New  
Tires on page 5-67 for more information.  
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles  
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 6-4.  
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to  
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.  
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to  
perform most like it did when the tires were new.  
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the  
correct rotation pattern shown here.  
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires  
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.  
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When  
Replacement on page 5-72.  
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire  
rotation.  
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front  
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire  
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-20.  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire  
When It Is Time for New Tires  
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,  
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions  
influence when you need new tires.  
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly  
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under  
One way to tell when it  
is time for new tires is  
to check the treadwear  
indicators, which will  
appear when your tires  
have only 1/16 inch  
(1.6 mm) or less of tread  
remaining.  
{ CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after time. The wheel could  
come off and cause an accident. When you  
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from  
places where the wheel attaches to the  
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth  
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a  
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all  
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on  
page 5-76.  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You need new tires if any of the following statements  
are true:  
Buying New Tires  
GM has developed and matched specific tires for  
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed  
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed  
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need  
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that  
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This  
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are  
designed to give the same performance and vehicle  
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.  
You can see the indicators at three or more places  
around the tire.  
You can see cord or fabric showing through the  
tire’s rubber.  
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged  
deep enough to show cord or fabric.  
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.  
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that  
cannot be repaired well because of the size or  
location of the damage.  
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers  
over a dozen critical specifications that impact the  
overall performance of your vehicle, including brake  
system performance, ride and handling, traction  
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.  
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s  
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an  
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will  
be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire  
Sidewall Labeling on page 5-53 for additional  
information.  
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they  
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,  
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how  
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,  
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.  
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear  
out before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure  
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,  
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.  
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will  
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did  
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a  
full set of tires can affect the braking and handling  
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection  
and Rotation on page 5-66 for information on  
proper tire rotation.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the  
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after  
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel  
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only  
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those  
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure  
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,  
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)  
as your vehicle’s original tires.  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control  
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,  
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),  
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you  
could have a crash. Using tires of different  
sizes, brands, or types may also cause  
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the  
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all  
wheels. It is all right to drive with your compact  
spare temporarily, as it was developed for use  
on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on  
page 5-89.  
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring  
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure  
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed  
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give  
a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than  
the proper warning level you would get with TPC  
Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System  
on page 5-61.  
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed  
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.  
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20, for more  
information about the Tire and Loading Information  
Label and its location on your vehicle.  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Different Size Tires and Wheels  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than  
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect  
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking,  
ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance  
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic  
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and  
electronic stability control, the performance of these  
systems can be affected.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable  
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder  
and maximum section width. For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA  
Temperature A  
The following information relates to the  
system developed by the United States National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),  
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and  
temperature performance. This applies only to  
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are  
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car  
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)  
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type  
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use  
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters  
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some  
limited-production tires.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may  
not provide an acceptable level of performance and  
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels  
are selected. You may increase the chance that you  
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM  
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your  
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM  
certified technician.  
While the tires available on General Motors  
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with  
respect to these grades, they must also conform  
to federal safety requirements and additional  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)  
standards.  
See Buying New Tires on page 5-68 and Accessories  
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.  
5-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Treadwear  
Temperature – A, B, C  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating  
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified  
government test course. For example, a tire  
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times  
as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires  
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,  
however, and may depart significantly from the  
norm due to variations in driving habits, service  
practices, and differences in road characteristics  
and climate.  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,  
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the  
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive  
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.  
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the  
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.  
Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  
minimum required by law. It should be noted that  
the temperature grade for this tire is established for  
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive  
loading, either separately or in combination, can  
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are  
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s  
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under  
controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C  
may have poor traction performance.  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
Wheel Replacement  
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and  
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest  
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to  
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary  
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire  
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other,  
the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice  
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,  
the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced.  
See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly  
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the  
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.  
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum  
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your  
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.  
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel  
you need.  
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying  
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted  
the same way as the one it replaces.  
5-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,  
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)  
sensors, replace them only with new GM original  
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the  
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors  
for your vehicle.  
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems  
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or  
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,  
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain  
clearance to the body and chassis.  
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more  
information.  
Used Replacement Wheels  
{ CAUTION:  
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,  
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.  
It could affect the braking and handling of your  
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you  
lose control. You could have a collision in which  
you or others could be injured. Always use the  
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for  
replacement.  
{ CAUTION:  
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.  
You cannot know how it has been used or how  
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and  
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,  
use a new GM original equipment wheel.  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Chains  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.  
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive  
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is  
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your  
vehicle’s wheels.  
{ CAUTION:  
If your vehicle has P215/60R16, P225/50R17, or  
P225/50R18 size tires, do not use tire chains.  
There is not enough clearance.  
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install  
them on the front tires.  
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper  
amount of clearance can cause damage to the  
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.  
The area damaged by the tire chains could  
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and  
you or others may be injured in a crash.  
Notice: If your vehicle has P205/65R15 size tires,  
use tire chains only where legal and only when you  
must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains that are the  
proper size for your tires. Install them on the front  
tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the  
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the  
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the  
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten  
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it  
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with  
chains on will damage your vehicle.  
Use another type of traction device only if its  
manufacturer recommends it for use on your  
vehicle and tire size combination and road  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a Tire Goes Flat  
{ CAUTION:  
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,  
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.  
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out  
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here  
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:  
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do  
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the  
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack  
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for  
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,  
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the  
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with  
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.  
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls  
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.  
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake  
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.  
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like  
a skid and may require the same correction you would  
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from  
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by  
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be  
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently  
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.  
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the  
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing a Flat Tire  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage  
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard  
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers  
on page 3-6.  
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while  
the vehicle is raised.  
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the  
vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,  
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the  
tire farthest away from the one being changed.  
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the  
opposite end of the vehicle.  
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle  
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or  
other people. You and they could be badly injured  
or even killed. Find a level place to change your  
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:  
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following  
example as a guide to assist you in the placement  
of wheel blocks (A).  
1. Set the parking brake firmly.  
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools  
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more  
information.  
2. Remove the spare tire cover.  
A. Wheel Block  
B. Flat Tire  
The following information explains how to use the jack  
and change a tire.  
3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.  
Then remove the compact spare tire. See Compact  
Spare Tire on page 5-89 for more information.  
4. Remove the wing nut holding the jack in place.  
5. Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk.  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tire Changing Tools  
1. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to loosen wheel  
wrench.  
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A)  
and jack (B).  
2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.  
5-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the Flat Tire and  
Installing the Spare Tire  
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing  
a Flat Tire on page 5-76.  
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap that has  
plastic wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic nut caps.  
You might need to use the wheel wrench to loosen  
them. Do not pry off wheel covers or center caps that  
have plastic wheel nut caps.  
3. Remove the wheel cover or center cap from the  
wheel to locate the wheel nuts.  
If the vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap without  
plastic wheel nut caps, gently pry on the edge of the  
plastic wheel trim to remove it from the wheel to  
locate the wheel nuts.  
3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench by pressing  
the button and pulling on the end of the wrench.  
You must do this before using the wheel wrench.  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Use the wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Do not  
remove them yet.  
5. Position the lift head at the jack location nearest  
the flat tire. Make sure all of the jack lift head is  
touching the jacking flange under the body. Do not  
place the jack under a body panel.  
6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.  
5-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is  
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you  
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under  
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.  
{ CAUTION:  
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly  
positioned can damage the vehicle and even  
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury  
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift  
head into the proper location before raising the  
vehicle.  
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wrench clockwise.  
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there  
is enough room for the compact spare tire to fit.  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Remove all of the  
wheel nuts.  
{ CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which  
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose  
after time. The wheel could come off and cause an  
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust  
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the  
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper  
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire  
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.  
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.  
9. Remove the flat tire.  
10. Remove any rust or dirt  
from the wheel bolts,  
mounting surfaces  
and spare wheel.  
5-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Install the compact spare tire.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because  
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel  
could fall off, causing a crash.  
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end  
toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand or  
with the wrench until the wheel is held against  
the hub.  
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wrench  
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. Tighten the wheel nuts  
firmly in a crisscross  
{ CAUTION:  
sequence, as shown,  
with the wheel wrench.  
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly  
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose  
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened  
with a torque wrench to the proper torque  
specification after replacing. Follow the torque  
specification supplied by the aftermarket  
manufacturer when using accessory locking  
on page 5-108 for original equipment wheel nut  
torque specifications.  
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s  
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on  
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could  
be damaged.  
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare  
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel nut  
caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or  
replaced.  
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can  
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid  
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel  
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque  
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on  
page 5-108 for the wheel nut torque specification.  
5-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and  
Tools  
Storing a Flat Tire and Tools  
{ CAUTION:  
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the  
passenger compartment of the vehicle could  
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose  
equipment could strike someone. Store all these  
in the proper place.  
3. Collapse the wrench using the same button used to  
extend it.  
To store the flat tire and jack in the compact spare tire  
compartment:  
4. Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on  
the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack.  
Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the  
side of the jack.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.  
2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellow sleeve)  
from the jack and remove the center cap from the  
wheel.  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Raise the jack to the  
height shown and  
lock the wrench onto  
the jack.  
7. With the valve stem up, place the tire on the  
compartment floor with the rear of the tire under the  
trim panel. The tire may not lay completely flat.  
8. Line up the bolt with the wheel center.  
9. With the yellow cap in place to prevent the wheel  
from being scratched, screw the bolt extension  
onto the bolt through the wheel center hole.  
10. Remove the yellow cap from the bolt extension.  
11. Secure the tire and wheel with the larger wing nut.  
6. Place the jack over the bolt (A) on the floor, making  
sure it contacts the bolt. Thread the jack retainer  
nut until it contacts the jack.  
5-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. Cover  
B. Wing Nut  
C. Extension  
D. Flat Tire (valve stem up)  
E. Nut  
F. Jack  
G. Bolt  
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace  
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon  
as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-89.  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools  
{ CAUTION:  
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the  
passenger compartment of the vehicle could  
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose  
equipment could strike someone. Store all these  
in the proper place.  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.  
2. Collapse the wrench using the same button used to  
extend it.  
3. Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on  
the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack.  
Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the  
side of the jack.  
5-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Raise the jack to the  
height shown and  
lock the wrench onto  
the jack.  
Compact Spare Tire  
{ CAUTION:  
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at  
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.  
This could lead to a crash and you or others could  
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at  
a time.  
5. Place the jack in the spare tire well. Make sure the  
stow bolt goes through the hole in the center of the  
wrench on the jack, with the base of the jack towards  
the front of the vehicle. Turn the jack retainer nut until  
it firmly contacts the wrench. Do not over tighten.  
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated  
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.  
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be  
60 psi (420 kPa).  
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,  
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare  
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made  
to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)  
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you  
can finish your trip and have the full-size tire  
repaired or replaced at your convenience.  
6. Place the compact spare into the tire compartment  
with the stow bolt going through the center hole of  
the wheel.  
7. Turn the spare tire retainer nut until it firmly  
contacts the wheel. Do not over tighten.  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a  
full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire  
will last longer and be in good shape in case it is  
needed again.  
Appearance Care  
Interior Cleaning  
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,  
do not take the vehicle through an automatic car  
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can  
get caught on the rails which can damage the tire,  
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.  
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is  
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt  
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage  
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular  
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from  
the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery  
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should  
be removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior  
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains  
to set rapidly.  
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.  
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with  
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the  
spare tire and its wheel together.  
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.  
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage  
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the  
compact spare.  
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent  
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments  
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer  
color to the vehicle’s interior.  
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners  
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.  
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on  
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass  
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray  
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,  
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.  
5-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning  
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch  
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window  
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,  
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.  
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with  
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and  
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops  
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.  
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.  
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become  
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before  
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions  
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,  
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s  
doors and windows.  
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.  
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that  
can damage the vehicle’s interior.  
Fabric/Carpet  
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs  
using a small brush with soft bristles.  
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment  
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister  
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used  
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,  
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.  
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as  
possible using one of the following techniques:  
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s  
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be  
obtained from your dealer/retailer.  
Do not clean the vehicle using:  
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil  
from any interior surface.  
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper  
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel  
until no more can be removed.  
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s  
interior surfaces.  
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and  
then vacuum.  
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a  
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage  
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness  
of soil removal.  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To clean:  
Leather  
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or  
club soda.  
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to  
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,  
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be  
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat  
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot  
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial  
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve  
and protect leather may permanently change the  
appearance and feel of the leather and are not  
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based  
products, or those containing organic solvents to  
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the  
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform  
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.  
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.  
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub  
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean  
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.  
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the  
cleaning cloth remains clean.  
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild  
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process  
that was used with plain water.  
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner  
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial  
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small  
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned  
area gives any impression that a ring formation may  
result, clean the entire surface.  
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other  
Plastic Surfaces  
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper  
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the  
fabric or carpet.  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to  
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,  
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution  
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never  
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.  
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are  
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces  
may permanently change the appearance and  
feel of the interior and are not recommended.  
5-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those  
containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior  
because they can alter the appearance by increasing the  
gloss in a non-uniform manner.  
Weatherstrips  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply  
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,  
damp weather frequent application may be required.  
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the  
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause  
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make  
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain  
conditions.  
Washing Your Vehicle  
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep  
it clean by washing it often.  
Care of Safety Belts  
Keep belts clean and dry.  
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can  
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.  
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that  
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it  
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would  
not be covered by the warranty.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely  
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able  
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts  
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.  
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car  
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are  
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,  
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the  
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained  
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’  
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary  
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any  
vehicle care product.  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to  
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are  
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.  
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,  
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are  
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat  
paint finish.  
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton  
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.  
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive  
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish  
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and  
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat  
paint finish on the vehicle.  
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter  
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer  
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.  
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)  
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.  
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird  
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,  
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on  
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.  
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked  
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses  
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a  
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.  
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on  
page 5-93.  
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather  
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a  
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking  
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever  
possible.  
Finish Care  
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle  
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from  
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can  
be obtained from your dealer/retailer.  
5-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts  
Aluminum Wheels  
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep  
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually  
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on  
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.  
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may  
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving  
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,  
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are  
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.  
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and  
water after exposure.  
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid  
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome  
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.  
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended  
for all bright metal parts.  
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive  
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain  
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could  
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs  
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels.  
Windshield and Wiper Blades  
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.  
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or  
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or  
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly  
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,  
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may  
cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if  
they are worn or damaged.  
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild  
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing  
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then  
be applied.  
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels  
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not  
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome  
polish on chrome wheels only.  
Wipers can be damaged by:  
Extreme dusty conditions  
Sand and salt  
Heat and sun  
Snow and ice, without proper removal  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted  
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,  
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,  
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes  
on them because the surface could be damaged.  
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.  
Sheet Metal Damage  
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop  
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or  
replaced to restore corrosion protection.  
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide  
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle  
warranty.  
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic  
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning  
brushes, could damage the aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a  
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels  
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone  
carbide tire cleaning brushes.  
Finish Damage  
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the  
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will  
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair  
expense.  
Tires  
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with  
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.  
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in  
your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.  
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.  
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing  
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish  
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always  
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces  
on the vehicle.  
5-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Underbody Maintenance  
Vehicle Identification  
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  
control can collect on the underbody. If these are  
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the  
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,  
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion  
protection.  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
At least every spring, flush these materials from the  
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where  
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas  
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.  
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system  
can do this.  
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on  
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the  
driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from  
outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle  
Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates  
of title and registration.  
Chemical Paint Spotting  
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create  
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can  
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and  
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.  
Engine Identification  
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.  
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,  
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine  
Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications  
on page 5-108 for the vehicle’s engine code.  
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we  
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces  
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,  
whichever occurs first.  
5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if  
the vehicle is not operating.  
Service Parts Identification Label  
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is  
very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label  
has the following information:  
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to  
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Model designation  
Windshield Wiper Fuses  
Paint information  
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit  
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy  
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the  
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it  
fixed.  
Production options and special equipment  
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.  
Electrical System  
Power Windows and Other Power  
Options  
Add-On Electrical Equipment  
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.  
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens  
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.  
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the  
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer  
first. Some electrical equipment can damage the  
vehicle and the damage would not be covered  
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical  
equipment can keep other components from working  
as they should.  
5-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Instrument Panel Fuse Block  
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers  
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of  
damage caused by electrical problems.  
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the  
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure  
to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical  
size and rating.  
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in  
the center of the instrument panel, one in the engine  
compartment and one in the trunk.  
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel  
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses  
from the fuse block.  
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the  
instrument panel near the floor on the passenger  
side of the vehicle.  
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block, then  
remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.  
The vehicle might not have all the fuses and features  
listed.  
5-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
POWER  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
IGN SENSOR  
Ignition Switch  
Power Mirrors  
MIRRORS  
STRG WHL  
ILLUM  
Steering Wheel Illumination  
EPS  
Electronic Power Steering  
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger  
Airbag Status Indicator  
NOT  
RUN/CRANK  
HVAC  
Not Used  
INSTALLED  
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning  
BLOWER HIGH Blower - High Speed Relay  
RADIO  
Audio System  
Interior Lamps  
INTERIOR  
LIGHTS  
CLUSTER/  
THEFT  
Instrument Panel Cluster,  
Theft Deterrent System  
OnStar®  
NOT  
INSTALLED  
Not Used  
ONSTAR  
NOT  
INSTALLED  
POWER  
WINDOWS  
Not Used  
Power Windows  
AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)  
HVAC CTRL  
(IGN)  
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning  
Control (Ignition)  
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning  
HVAC CTRL  
(BATT)  
Control Diagnostic Link Connector  
(Battery)  
HVAC  
BLOWER  
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning  
Blower Switch  
PEDAL  
Not Used  
DOOR LOCK  
Door Locks  
WIPER SW  
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch  
ROOF/HEAT  
SEAT  
Sunroof, Heated Seat  
5-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Compartment Fuse Block  
Fuses  
Usage  
NOT  
The vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and  
features listed.  
Not Used  
Not Used  
INSTALLED  
NOT  
INSTALLED  
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the  
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.  
AIRBAG  
(BATT)  
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components  
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the  
covers on any electrical component.  
Airbag (Battery)  
SPARE FUSE  
HOLDER  
Spare Fuse Holder  
Spare Fuse Holder  
Spare Fuse Holder  
Spare Fuse Holder  
SPARE FUSE  
HOLDER  
SPARE FUSE  
HOLDER  
SPARE FUSE  
HOLDER  
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller  
5-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Usage  
Air Conditioner Clutch  
Electronic Throttle Control  
Fuses  
Usage  
1
2
Transmission Control Module  
Ignition 1  
4
5
6
7
Mass Airflow Sensor (LY7)  
Emission  
Left Headlamp Low-Beam  
Engine Control Module IGN 1  
(LZ4 & LZE)  
3
5-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
8
Usage  
Fuses  
25  
26  
Usage  
Body Control Module 2  
Starter  
Electric Power Steering  
Transmission Control Module  
Battery  
Ignition Module (LZ4, LZE & LE5);  
Injectors, Ignition Coils Odd (LY7)  
Injectors (LZ4, LZE & LE5);  
Injectors, Ignition Coils Even (LY7)  
Post Cat 02 Sensor Heaters  
(LY7, LZ4 & LZE)  
Daytime Running Lamps  
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp  
Driver Power Window  
Engine Control Module BATT  
(LZ4 & LZE)  
AIR Solenoid  
Horn  
9
Right Headlamp Low-Beam  
Front Fog Lamps  
Left Headlamp High-Beam  
Right Headlamp High-Beam  
Engine Control Module BATT  
(LY7 & LE5)  
Windshield Wiper  
10  
11  
12  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
13  
14  
15  
Antilock Brake System (IGN 1)  
Engine Control Module IGN 1  
(LY7 & LE5)  
16  
46  
47  
50  
17  
18  
Cooling Fan 1  
Cooling Fan 2  
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation,  
Air Conditioning Blower  
19  
51  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Body Control Module 1  
Body Control Module Run/Crank  
Rear Electrical Center 1  
Rear Electrical Center 2  
Antilock Brake System  
52  
54  
55  
56  
Regulated Voltage Control  
DC/AC Inverter  
Antilock Brake System BATT  
5-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Compartment Fuse Block  
Relays  
28  
Usage  
Cooling Fan 1  
29  
30  
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel  
Cooling Fan 2  
31  
Starter  
32  
33  
Run/Crank, Ignition  
Powertrain  
34  
35  
Air Conditioning Clutch  
High Beam  
36  
37  
Front Fog Lamps  
Horn  
38  
39  
40  
48  
Low-Beam Headlamp  
Windshield Wiper 1  
Windshield Wiper 2  
Daytime Running Lamps  
Stoplamps  
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunk  
of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the  
trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.  
49  
53  
AIR Solenoid  
Diodes  
Usage  
27  
Wiper  
5-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Usage  
Passenger Seat Controls  
Driver Seat Controls  
Not Used  
Fuses  
Usage  
1
2
3
4
5
Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid  
Park Lamps, Instrument Panel  
Dimming  
6
7
8
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
5-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
9
10  
Usage  
Relays  
26  
27  
28  
Usage  
Rear Window Defogger  
Park Lamps  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Sunroof Controls  
Not Used  
11  
12  
Not Used  
29  
Not Used  
13  
14  
15  
Audio Amplifier  
Heated Seat Controls  
Not Used  
30  
31  
32  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System, XM™ Satellite  
Radio, UGDO  
Back-up Lamps  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Auxiliary Power Outlets  
Not Used  
Trunk Release  
Rear Defog  
Heated Mirrors  
Fuel Pump  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
Back-up Lamps  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Trunk Release  
Fuel Pump  
Cargo Lamp  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
38 (Diode)  
5-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capacities and Specifications  
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.  
Capacities  
Application  
English  
Metric  
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge  
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located  
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more  
information.  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a  
Automatic Transmission*  
Automatic Transmission 4-Speed (Bottom Pan Removal)  
Automatic Transmission 6-Speed (Drain and Refill)  
Cooling System  
7.0 qt  
5.3 qt  
6.6 L  
5.0 L  
2.4L L4 Engine  
7.5 qt  
9.7 qt  
7.1 L  
9.2 L  
3.5L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engine  
Engine Oil with Filter  
2.4L L4 Engine  
5.0 qt  
4.0 qt  
5.5 qt  
4.7 L  
3.8 L  
5.2 L  
3.5L V6 Engine  
3.6L V6 Engine  
5-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Capacities  
Application  
English  
16.3 gal  
100 lb ft  
Metric  
61.7 L  
Fuel Tank  
Wheel Nut Torque  
140 Y  
*Transmission fluid capacity is approximate. See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-28 for information on  
checking fluid level.  
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this  
manual.  
Engine Specifications  
Engine  
VIN Code  
Transmission  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Spark Plug Gap  
0.040 in (1.01 mm)  
0.040 in (1.01 mm)  
0.040 in (1.01 mm)  
0.044 in (1.10 mm)  
2.4L L4  
3.5L V6  
3.5L V6  
3.6L V6  
B
K
N
7
5-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
5-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle and the Environment  
Maintenance Schedule  
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep  
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps  
the environment. All recommended maintenance is  
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect  
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or  
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions  
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to  
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain  
the vehicle properly.  
Introduction  
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and  
change as recommended.  
Using the Maintenance Schedule  
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working  
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive  
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times  
a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in  
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in  
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do  
errands, or in many other ways.  
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan  
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty  
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for  
details.  
Maintenance Requirements  
Because of all the different ways people use their  
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need  
more frequent checks and replacements. So please read  
the following and note how you drive. If you have any  
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,  
see your dealer/retailer.  
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,  
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and  
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary  
to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any  
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled  
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This schedule is for vehicles that:  
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless  
you are technically qualified and have the necessary  
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.  
carry passengers and cargo within recommended  
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.  
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.  
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained  
and supported service technicians will perform the work  
using genuine parts.  
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  
driving limits.  
To purchase service information, see Service  
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane  
on page 5-6.  
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells what  
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily  
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.  
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
should be performed when indicated. See Additional  
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.  
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to  
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on  
page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure  
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all  
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives  
the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts  
from your dealer/retailer.  
{ CAUTION:  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be  
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be  
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work  
only if you have the required know-how and the  
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have  
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a  
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your  
Own Service Work on page 5-4.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,  
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.  
Required services are described in the following for  
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is  
recommended that the first service be Maintenance I, the  
second service be Maintenance II, and then alternate  
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However,  
in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more  
often.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays in  
the Driver Information Center (DIC), service is required  
for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as  
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is  
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the  
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle  
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine  
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at  
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer  
has trained service technicians who will perform this work  
using genuine parts and reset the system.  
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message  
displays within 10 months since the vehicle was  
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.  
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous  
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use  
Maintenance II whenever the message displays  
10 months or more since the last service or if the  
message has not come on at all for one year.  
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,  
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since  
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system  
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System  
on page 5-24 for information on the Engine Oil Life  
System and resetting the system.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scheduled Maintenance  
Service  
Maintenance I Maintenance II  
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-21. Reset oil life system.  
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-24. An Emission Control Service.  
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26. See footnote (k).  
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and  
Rotation on page 5-66 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on  
page 6-9.  
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).  
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as  
needed.  
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”  
in this section.  
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).  
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).  
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).  
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).  
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).  
3.6L Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid as  
needed.  
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Required Services  
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles  
(kilometers) shown for each item.  
Additional Required Services  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.  
Inspect exhaust system for loose or  
damaged components.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See  
Change automatic transmission fluid  
(severe service only). Change filter  
(except 6-speed). See footnote (h).  
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug  
wires (V6 only). An Emission Control  
Service.  
Engine cooling system service (or every  
five years, whichever occurs first).  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (i).  
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (l).  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety  
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other  
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see  
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing  
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety  
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems  
on page 1-73.  
Maintenance Footnotes  
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper  
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect  
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface  
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,  
parking brake, etc.  
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and  
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges  
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required  
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying  
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will  
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or  
squeak.  
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and  
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or  
signs of wear. Inspect electric power steering cables for  
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect  
hydraulic power steering lines and hoses for proper  
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.  
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they  
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,  
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as  
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test  
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the  
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is  
recommended at least once a year.  
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for  
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.  
Replace any components that have high effort or  
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise  
control cables.  
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter  
(except 6-speed) if the vehicle is mainly driven under  
one or more of these conditions:  
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or  
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,  
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn  
on page 5-50 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on  
page 5-95 for more information.  
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
When doing frequent trailer towing.  
Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery  
service.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can  
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform  
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-29 for what to  
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure  
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and  
pressure cap.  
At Each Fuel Fill  
It is important to perform these underhood checks at  
each fuel fill.  
Engine Oil Level Check  
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a  
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and  
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.  
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil  
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to  
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause  
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect  
the filter at each engine oil change.  
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if  
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-21.  
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or  
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Owner Checks and Services  
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant  
on page 5-29.  
These owner checks and services should be performed  
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,  
dependability, and emission control performance. Your  
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.  
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check  
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield  
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if  
necessary.  
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.  
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the  
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
At Least Once a Month  
Tire Inflation Check  
At Least Once a Year  
Starter Switch Check  
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are  
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to  
check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-59. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored  
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.  
{ CAUTION:  
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle  
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or  
others could be injured.  
Tire Wear Inspection  
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway  
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service  
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,  
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on  
page 5-66.  
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough  
room around the vehicle.  
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular  
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.  
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to  
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.  
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle  
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the  
vehicle starts in any other position, contact  
your dealer/retailer for service.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,  
but do not start the engine. Without applying the  
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out  
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever  
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer  
for service.  
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock  
Control System Check  
{ CAUTION:  
Ignition Transmission Lock Check  
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle  
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or  
others could be injured.  
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn  
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.  
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only  
when the shift lever is in P (Park).  
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough  
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a  
level surface.  
The ignition key should come out only in  
LOCK/OFF.  
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake  
on page 2-32.  
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if  
the vehicle begins to move.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.  
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking  
brake.  
Parking Brake and Automatic  
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism  
Check  
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the  
engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral),  
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake  
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking  
brake only.  
{ CAUTION:  
To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:  
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then  
release the parking brake followed by the regular  
brake.  
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could  
begin to move. You or others could be injured and  
property could be damaged. Make sure there is  
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once  
should the vehicle begin to move.  
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.  
Underbody Flushing Service  
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any  
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to  
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris  
can collect.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Hydraulic  
Power Steering  
System  
(if equipped)  
Automatic  
GM Power Steering Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,  
in Canada 89021186).  
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part  
number, or specification can be obtained from your  
dealer/retailer.  
DEXRON®-VI Automatic  
Transmission Transmission Fluid.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Key Lock  
Cylinders  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Engine oil which meets GM  
Standard GM6094M and displays  
the American Petroleum Institute  
Certified for Gasoline Engines  
starburst symbol. To determine the  
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s  
engine, see Engine Oil on  
page 5-21.  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only DEX-COOL®  
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on  
page 5-29.  
Hood Latch  
Assembly,  
Secondary  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,  
Engine Oil  
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant  
Spring  
Anchor, and  
Release Pawl  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 109435474).  
Hood and Door  
Hinges  
Engine Coolant  
Weatherstrip Lubricant  
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,  
in Canada 88862807).  
Hydraulic Brake  
System  
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,  
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or  
Conditioning  
Dielectric Silicone Grease  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,  
in Canada 992887).  
Windshield  
Washer  
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Replacement Parts  
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.  
Part  
Part Numbers  
ACDelco Part Numbers  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
Engine Oil Filter  
2.4L L4 Engine  
3.5L V6 Engine  
3.6L V6 Engine  
Spark Plugs  
22676970  
A1627C  
12605566  
89017342  
89017524  
PF457G  
PF61  
PF48  
2.4L L4 Engine  
3.5L V6 Engine  
3.6L V6 Engine  
Wiper Blades  
12625058  
12591131  
12597464  
41-103  
41-100  
41-990  
Driver Side – 23.6 in (60.0 cm)  
25800624  
25800623  
Passenger Side – 21.0 in (53.0 cm)  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Drive Belt Routing  
3.5L V6 Engine  
2.4L I4 Engine  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.6L V6 Engine  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record  
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the  
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional  
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should  
retain all maintenance receipts.  
Maintenance Record  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7  
Customer Assistance Information  
OnStar® ......................................................7-19  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership  
management, it appears your concern cannot be  
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the  
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center  
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors  
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at  
Customer Assistance and  
Information  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).  
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to  
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns  
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle  
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service  
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best  
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can  
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your  
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:  
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to  
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following  
information available to give the Customer Assistance  
Representative:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available  
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the  
top left of the instrument panel and visible through  
the windshield.  
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of  
dealership management. Normally, concerns can  
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has  
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts  
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the  
general manager.  
Dealership name and location.  
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.  
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your  
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.  
That is why we suggest following Step One first.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors  
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are  
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if  
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the  
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file  
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line  
Program to enforce your rights.  
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the  
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following  
address:  
BBB Auto Line Program  
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.  
4200 Wilson Boulevard  
Suite 800  
Arlington, VA 22203-1838  
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program  
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus  
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or  
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
Although you may be required to resort to this informal  
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,  
use of the program is free of charge and your case will  
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree  
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and  
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
dr.bbb.org/goauto  
This program is available in all 50 states and the District  
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,  
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to  
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its  
participation in this program.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event  
that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed  
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,  
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware  
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration  
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has  
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes  
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The  
program provides for the review of the facts involved by  
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an  
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is  
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,  
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,  
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our  
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most  
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of  
charge.  
For further information concerning eligibility in the  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call  
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors  
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777  
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:  
The Mediation/Arbitration Program  
c/o Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Mail Code: CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN).  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca  
Online Owner Center  
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of  
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM  
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools  
and forms with greater ease.  
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —  
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet  
Information and services customized for your specific  
vehicle — all in one convenient place.  
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you  
will have access to:  
Digital owner manual, warranty information,  
and more  
My Showroom: Find and save information on  
vehicles and current offers in your area.  
Online service and maintenance records  
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide  
Exclusive privileges and offers  
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address  
and phone number for each of your preferred GM  
dealers/retailers.  
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and  
service estimates, check trade-in values, or  
schedule a service appointment by adding the  
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.  
Recall notices for your specific vehicle  
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings  
summaries  
Other Helpful Links:  
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com  
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com  
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter  
FAQ  
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools  
and forms with greater ease.  
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within  
www.gm.ca.  
Contact Us  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
From Puerto Rico:  
Customer Assistance for Text  
Telephone (TTY) Users  
1-800-496-9992 (English)  
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)  
From U.S. Virgin Islands:  
1-800-496-9994  
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or  
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),  
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer  
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can  
Canada — Customer Assistance  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV  
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Customer Assistance Offices  
gmcanada.com  
1-800-263-3777 (English)  
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free  
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes  
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be  
addressed to:  
1-800-263-7854 (French)  
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800  
Overseas — Customer Assistance  
United States — Customer Assistance  
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.  
Chevrolet Motor Division  
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center  
P.O. Box 33170  
Detroit, MI 48232-5170  
Chevrolet.com  
1-800-222-1020  
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The offer is available for a very limited period of time  
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more  
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit  
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance  
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,  
call 1-800-833-9935.  
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean  
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico  
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer  
Assistance  
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.  
Customer Assistance Center  
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740  
Col. Lomas de Bezares  
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.  
01-800-508-0000  
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800  
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.  
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users  
call 1-800-263-3830.  
Roadside Assistance Program  
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA  
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):  
1-888-889-2438).  
GM Mobility Reimbursement  
Program  
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.  
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible  
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,  
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Calling for Assistance  
Coverage  
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following  
information ready:  
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles  
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.  
Your name, home address, and home telephone  
number  
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.  
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without  
permission from the owner is not covered.  
Telephone number of your location  
Location of the vehicle  
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of  
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes  
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at  
any time without notification.  
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the  
vehicle  
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle  
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve  
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver  
if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same  
type of claim is made many times.  
Description of the problem  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Services Provided  
Services Not Included in Roadside  
Assistance  
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel  
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.  
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.  
Legal fines.  
Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the  
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be  
available if you have OnStar®. For security reasons,  
the driver must present identification before this  
service is given.  
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,  
chains, or other traction devices.  
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a  
non-public road or highway.  
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:  
Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty  
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot  
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle  
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.  
Services Specific to Canadian  
Purchased Vehicles  
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately  
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.  
Propane and other fuels are not provided through  
this service.  
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a  
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,  
must be in good condition and properly inflated.  
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or  
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the  
warranty.  
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.  
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North  
America are provided when requested either with the  
most direct route or the most scenic route. There  
is a limit of six requests per year. Additional travel  
information is also available. Allow three weeks for  
delivery.  
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump  
start a dead battery.  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your  
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental  
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/  
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty  
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and  
rental car.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must  
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was  
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited  
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,  
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization  
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor  
will help you make arrangements and explain how to  
receive payment.  
Scheduling Service Appointments  
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact  
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By  
scheduling a service appointment and advising your  
service consultant of your transportation needs, your  
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.  
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service  
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be  
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is  
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,  
let them know this, and ask for instructions.  
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be  
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance  
advisor may give you permission to get local  
emergency road service. You will receive payment,  
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to  
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be  
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for  
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner  
responsibility.  
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for  
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day  
as possible to allow for the same day repair.  
Courtesy Transportation  
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our  
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy  
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles  
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage  
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid  
specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Several courtesy transportation options are available to  
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty  
repairs are required.  
Public Transportation or Fuel  
Reimbursement  
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and  
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s  
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by  
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum  
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,  
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation  
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for  
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim  
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported  
by original receipts. See your dealer for information  
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement  
of fuel or other transportation costs.  
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty  
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with  
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage  
information.  
Transportation Options  
Warranty service can generally be completed while you  
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to  
minimize your inconvenience by providing several  
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,  
your dealer can offer you one of the following:  
Shuttle Service  
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering  
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you  
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with  
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes  
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable  
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Courtesy Rental Vehicle  
Collision Damage Repair  
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy  
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that  
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty  
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be  
supported by original receipts. This requires that you  
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/  
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.  
Requirements vary and may include minimum age  
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.  
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may  
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,  
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the  
completion of the repair.  
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,  
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician  
using the proper equipment and quality replacement  
parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your  
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be  
compromised in subsequent collisions.  
Collision Parts  
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the  
same materials and construction methods as the parts  
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM  
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your  
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety  
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help  
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.  
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a  
courtesy rental.  
Additional Program Information  
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for  
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles  
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the  
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the  
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be  
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally  
designed appearance and safety performance, however,  
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not  
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and  
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.  
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be  
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer  
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy  
Transportation arrangements will be administered by  
appropriate dealer personnel.  
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,  
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any  
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility  
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein  
at its sole discretion.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are  
made by companies other than GM and may not have  
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may  
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,  
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.  
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related  
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.  
Insuring Your Vehicle  
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with  
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.  
There are significant differences in the quality of  
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.  
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to  
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage  
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some  
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision  
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that  
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original  
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is  
not available from your current insurance carrier,  
consider switching to another insurance carrier.  
Repair Facility  
We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility  
that meets your needs before you ever need collision  
repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a collision repair  
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art  
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair  
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable  
equipment.  
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may  
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with  
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)  
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read  
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the  
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gather the important information you will need from  
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone  
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license  
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and  
policy number, and a general description of the  
damage to the other vehicle.  
If a Crash Occurs  
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.  
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you  
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your  
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.  
If there has been an injury, call emergency services  
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all  
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle  
only if its position puts you in danger or you are  
instructed to move it by a police officer.  
If possible, call your insurance company from  
the scene of the crash. They will walk you through  
the information they will need. If they ask for a  
police report, phone or go to the police department  
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of  
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces  
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be  
necessary. This is especially true if there are no  
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.  
Give only the necessary and requested information  
to police and other parties involved in the crash.  
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame  
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will  
help guard against post-crash legal action.  
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your  
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a  
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,  
make sure you are comfortable with them.  
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable  
with their work for a long time.  
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside  
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on  
page 7-7 for more information.  
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the  
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the  
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,  
the service’s name, and the phone number.  
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and  
make sure you understand what work will be  
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,  
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome  
this opportunity.  
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is  
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance  
information and registration if you keep these items  
in your vehicle.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair  
Process  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
United States Government  
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,  
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.  
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take  
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the  
facility that any required replacement collision parts be  
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or  
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts  
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which  
could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)  
in addition to notifying General Motors.  
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must  
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,  
your insurance company may initially value the repair  
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair  
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember  
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the  
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your  
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open  
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect  
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall  
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot  
become involved in individual problems between  
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle  
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:  
1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to:  
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the  
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation  
based on that insurance company’s collision policy  
repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that  
company. In such cases, you can have control of the  
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within  
reasonable limits.  
Administrator, NHTSA  
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.  
Washington D.C., 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
Canadian Government  
Service Publications Ordering  
Information  
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your  
Service Manuals  
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada  
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of  
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:  
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair  
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,  
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.  
Transport Canada  
Road Safety Branch  
2780 Sheffield Road  
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9  
Service Bulletins  
Service Bulletins give additional technical service  
information needed to knowledgeably service  
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin  
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and  
service of your vehicle.  
Reporting Safety Defects to  
General Motors  
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in  
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.  
Owner Information  
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:  
Owner publications are written specifically for owners  
and intended to provide basic operational information  
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the  
Maintenance Schedule for all models.  
Chevrolet Motor Division  
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center  
P.O. Box 33170  
Detroit, MI 48232-5170  
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and  
Warranty Booklet.  
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or  
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee  
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Current and Past Model Order Forms  
Vehicle Data Recording and  
Privacy  
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for  
current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order  
form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.  
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated  
computers that record information about the vehicle’s  
performance and how it is driven. For example, your  
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control  
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the  
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a  
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to  
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may  
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service  
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about  
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel  
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123  
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM  
Eastern Time  
For Credit Card Orders Only  
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.  
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com  
Or you can write to:  
Helm, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 07130  
Detroit, MI 48207  
consumption or average speed. These modules may also  
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio  
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.  
Prices are subject to change without notice and without  
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.  
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are  
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make  
checks payable in U.S. funds.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only  
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded  
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no  
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash  
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law  
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type  
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a  
crash investigation.  
Event Data Recorders  
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).  
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain  
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag  
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist  
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.  
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle  
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,  
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is  
designed to record such data as:  
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment  
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is  
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other  
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special  
equipment, can read the information if they have access  
to the vehicle or the EDR.  
How various systems in your vehicle were operating  
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts  
were buckled/fastened  
GM will not access this data or share it with others  
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the  
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in  
response to an official request of police or similar  
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation  
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.  
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for  
GM research needs or may be made available to others  
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the  
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.  
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the  
accelerator and/or brake pedal  
How fast the vehicle was traveling  
This data can help provide a better understanding of the  
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar®  
Radio Frequency  
Identification (RFID)  
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the  
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and  
Conditions for information on data collection and use.  
See also OnStar® System on page 2-40 in this manual  
for more information.  
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions  
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system  
security, as well as in connection with conveniences  
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and  
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door  
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use  
or record personal information or link with any other  
GM system containing personal information.  
Navigation System  
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the  
system may result in the storage of destinations,  
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip  
information. Refer to the navigation system operating  
manual for information on stored data and for deletion  
instructions.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bluetooth® ..................................................... 3-78  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning (cont.)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine (cont.)  
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-19  
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-20  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-60  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-19  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer  
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-40  
Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-78  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-19  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires (cont.)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-28  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Blackberry Cell Phone Curve8520BLKTMB User Manual
BMW Automobile 735iLE32 User Manual
Bose Universal Remote Personal Music Center III User Manual
Braun Mixer MR 5500 BC User Manual
Brother All in One Printer 2820 User Manual
Canon Photo Printer Printing Using a Direct Camera Printer Connection Guide Direct Print User Manual
Chevrolet Automobile 2009 HHR User Manual
Chicago Electric Impact Driver 92472 User Manual
Chief Manufacturing Indoor Furnishings PWC 2000 User Manual
Chromalox Water Heater TBL User Manual